MASTER 
NEGA  TIVE 

NO.  93-81166 


MICROFILMED  1993 
COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES/NEW  YORK 


as  part  of  the 
"Foundations  of  Western  Civilization  Preservation  Project" 


Funded  by  the 
NATIONAL  ENDOWMENT  FOR  THE  HUMANITIES 


Reproductions  may  not  be  made  without  permission  from 

Columbia  University  Library 


COPYRIGHT  STATEMENT 


The  copyright  law  of  the  United  States  -  Title  17,  United 
States  Code  -  concerns  the  making  of  photocopies  or 
other  reproductions  of  copyrighted  material. 

Under  certain  conditions  specified  in  the  law,  libraries  and 
archives  are  authorized  to  furnish  a  photocopy  or  other 
reproduction.  One  of  these  specified  conditions  is  that  the 
photocopy  or  other  reproduction  is  not  to  be  "used  for  any 
purpose  other  than  private  study,  scholarship,  or 
research."  If  a  user  makes  a  request  for,  or  later  uses,  a 
photocopy  or  reproduction  for  purposes  in  excess  of  "fair 
use,"  that  user  may  be  liable  for  copyright  infringement. 

This  institution  reserves  the  right  to  refuse  to  accept  a 
copy  order  if,  in  its  judgement,  fulfillment  of  the  order 
would  involve  violation  of  the  copyright  law. 


AUTHOR: 


GOODELL,  THOMAS 
DWIGHT 


TITLE: 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH; 

FIRST  LESSONS  IN  ... 


PLACE: 


NEW  YORK 


DA  TE : 


1889 


COLUMBIA  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION  DEPARTMENT 


Master  Negative  # 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC  MICROFORM  TARGET 


Original  Material  as  Filmed  -  Existing  Bibliographic  Record 


887.82 
G611 


Goodell,  Thomas  Dwight,  1854-  1920. 

The  GIrook  in  English;  first  lessons  in  Greek,  with  si)e- 
eial  reference  to  tlie  etymology  of  English  Avords  of  Greek 
origin,  by  Thomas  Dwight  Goodell ...  2d  ed.,  rev.  and  enl. 
New  York,  H.  Holt  and  compan}^,  1889. 

vii  p.,  1  1..  138  p.  i;*-"'. 

Another  copy  in  Plimpton  Library*      ^^188.^3 


Restrictions  on  Use: 


1.  Greek  language- -Composition  and  exercises. 

Library  of  Congress  PA258.G6 

Copyright    1889:  37270 


10-19307 


FILM     S1ZE:__3£_ 


TECHNICAL  MICROFORM  DATA 
REDUCTION    RATIO: ^± 


IMAGE  PLACEMENT:    lA    HA)  IB     IIB 

DATE     FILMED:__^JiiiLll INITIALS__2^^.^!^ 

FILMED  BY:    RESEARCH  PUBLICATIONS.  INC  WOODBRIDGE.  CT 


r 


V 


Association  for  information  and  Image  Rflanagement 

1100  Wayne  Avenue,  Suite  1100 
Silver  Spring.  Maryland  20910 

301/587-8202 


V 


Centimeter 


1 


8 


10       11       12       13       14       15   mm 


mi 


1111 


I     I 


iiiiliiiijiiiiliiiijiiiiliiiijiiiiliiiiliiiiliiiiiiiiiliiiijiiiiliiiiliiiiliiiijiiiiliiiiiiiiiliiiiiiiiiliiiiiiiiili 


Inches 


rrr 


1 


I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I 


1.0 


I.I 


.25 


TTT 


1^     2.8 

2.5 

1^ 

156       3.2 

2.2 

^  ¥■' 

^  1- 

2.0 

u. 

■"     u 

BiUU 

1.8 

1.4 

1.6 

I  i  I 


llllllllHIlllllillllll 


1 


T 


MflNUFfiCTURED   TO   RUM   STflNDRRDS 
BY   APPLIED   IMRGE,    INC. 


s,St.s.z 


^Gll 


Cif* 


GIVEN    BY 


T-rof. H.tv1,.]Bu^i 


I 


t 


THE 


I  ! 


'    .  '  W 


GREEK   IN   ENGLISH 


FIRST  LESSONS  IN  GREEK 


With  Special  Reference  to  the  Etymology  of  English 

Words  of  Greek  Origin 


BY 

THOMAS   DWIGHT    GOODELL 

ASSISTANT  PROFESSOR  IN  VALE  COLLEGE 


SECOND  EDITION,  REVISED  AND  ENLARGED 


NEW  YORK 
HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 

1889 


/  \ 


PREFACE. 


Copyright,  1886,  1889, 

BY 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO. 


Typography  by  J.  S.  Cushinq  &  Co.,  Boston. 


? 


'■o 


/* 


CD 


a. 


The  issue  of  a  second  edition  of  this  book  calls  for  very 
little  modification  of  what  was  said  in  the  preface  to  the 

first. 

The  object  of  it,  as  then  stated,  is  to  enable  pupils  to  gain 
some  real  and  living  knowledge  of  that  part  of  English  w^hich 
came  from  Greek,  without  at  the  same  time  compelling  them 
to  waste  time  and  brain-tissue  in  "mental  discipline"  of 
doubtful  value.  Let  it  be  said  at  once,  however,  that  the 
writer  has  no  faith  in  royal  roads  to  learning ;  does  not  pro- 
fess to  have  compounded  an  educational  nostrum  which  will, 
in  a  few  weeks'  time,  electrify  a  boy  or  girl  into  the  mastery 
of  a  difficult  tongue  ;  and  does  believe  heartily  in  giving  an 
important  place  in  our  educational  system,  for  some  genera- 
tions yet,  to  the  patient  and  thorough  study  of  the  Greek 
language  and  literature.  This  book  is  not  intended  to  lessen 
the  number  of  those  who  shall  enter  upon  such  a  course  of 
study,  indeed  it  is  hoped  that  it  may  increase  that  number. 
Yet  it  is  not  a  sufficient  introduction  to  the  reading  of  a 
classic  author,  and  hence  is  not  a  rival  of  the  various  excel- 
lent First  Lessons  in  use. 

It  merely  attempts  to  teach  that  minimum  which  even 
those  who  wish  to  banish  the  study  of  Greek  from  our  schools 
would  admit  can  least  easily  be  spared ;  and  it  is  written  in 
the  belief  that  that  portion  is  absolutely  essential  to  a  ready 
command  of  a  full  English  vocabulary.     • 

The  Greek  element  in  the  English  employed  in  any  con- 
versation or  writing  on  a  high  intellectual  plane,  is  not  only 
large,  but  includes  many  of  the  key-words  to  the  thought. 
He  to  whom  those  key-words  are  alive  with  meaning  enjoys 


142503 


IV 


P BE  FACE. 


a  great  advantage.  Many  a  man  who  thinks  he  has  retained 
nothing  whatever  from  his  dreary  conning  of  Greek  gram- 
mar, and  of  half-understood  Greek  authors,  except  a  lively 
sense  of  the  exact  meaning  of  such  words  as  cosmopolitan^ 
agnostic,  synthetic,  anarchy,  Russophobe,  nevertheless  regards 
the  firm  grasp  which  he  has  on  this  portion  of  our  speech  as 
worth  all  it  cost.  But  after  all,  how  great  the  cost  of  this 
one  acquisition  has  been !  Surely  this  one  result  of  the  study 
of  Greek  can  be  attained  in  a  fair  degree  without  devoting 
to  it  years  of  time. 

Yet  mere  dictionaries  or  etymological  handbooks  alone  can- 
not give  what  is  wanted.  It  is  not  enough  to  read  or  be  told, 
even  repeatedly,  that  synthetic  is  derived  from  such  and  such 
Greek  words,  and  therefore  has  such  and  such  a  meaning. 

o 

The  words  in  their  Greek  form,  and  with  some  fragment  of  their 
Greek  associations,  must  become  somewhat  familiar  before 
one  can  be  sensible  of  that  grasp  of  their  English  derivatives 
w^hich  will  enable  one  to  use  those  derivatives  fearlessly  and 
correctly. 

In  putting  these  ideas  into  practice,  the  following  con- 
siderations have  been  regarded : 

The  Latin  element  in  English  is  of  course  vastly  greater 
than  the  Greek,  so  that  no  one  ought  to  take  up  the  study  of 
the  latter  until  a  good  beginning  has  been  made  in  the 
former.  Accordingly  a  year's  study  of  Latin  is  taken  for 
granted.  Pupils  are  supposed  to  have  a  notion  of  what  a 
highly  inflected  language  is,  and  to  know  the  simplest  prin- 
ciples of  Latin  syntax. 

The  material  has  been  grouped  about  a  grammatical  out- 
line, because,  in  the  writer's  judgment,  based  upon  several 
years'  experience  in  teaching  beginners  in  Latin  and  Greek, 
such  an  outline  is  essential  to  the  object  in  view.  Thorough 
memorizing  of  a  few  inflections  will  save  time  and  labor  in 
the  end,  by  enabling  the  pupil  from  the  outset  to  make  a 
certain  limited  use  of  the  language  on  rational  principles. 


PBEFACK 


In  no  other  way  can  the  requisite  familiarity  with  the  Greek 
words  be  gained  as  easily.  Besides,  while  the  book  is 
intended  primarily  for  those  who,  without  it,  would  never 
study  Greek  at  all,  those  have  also  been  kept  in  mind  who 
will  afterwards  continue  the  study.  Accordingly,  also,  the 
quantity  of  doubtful  vowels  is  marked  ;  the  written  accent  is 
expected  to  be  learned  from  the  beginning,  although  all 
matter  concerning  it  is  put  in  smaller  type ;  the  dual  number, 
though  scarcely  used  in  the  exercises,  is  included  in  para- 
digms. Yet  with  the  possible  exception  of  the  dual  number, 
the  learning  of  which  is  but  a  trifle,  no  feature  whatever  has 
been  introduced  which  could  involve  labor  outside  of  the 
main  purpose,  as  set  forth  above.  Thus  the  subject  of  con- 
traction has  been  avoided,  because  it  would  have  involved 
difficulties  in  the  paradigms.  In  other  respects,  also,  strict 
Atticism  has  been  disregarded,  because  it  would  have  ob- 
scured the  relation  of  English  derivatives  to  Greek  originals. 
The  non-Attic  look  thus  given  to  some  of  the  paradigms 
and  exercises  can  do  no  harm  to  any  one.  In  a  few  instances 
an  uncommon  or  poetical  construction  has  been  employed, 
instead  of  one  which,  from  the  Greek  point  of  view,  would  be 
preferable,  merely  because  the  former,  from  likeness  to  the 
English  idiom,  is  easier,  and  can  be  used  without  explana- 
tion. '^ 

In  selecting  the  vocabulary,  no  attempt  has  been  made  at 
an  unattainable  completeness.  From  the  large  number  of 
Greek  words  that  appear  in  English  —  far  larger  than  one 
would  suspect  who  has  not  given  special  attention  to  the 
matter  —  those  have  been  rejected  which  seemed  likely  to  be 
of  least  use  for  the  purposes  here  indicated.  Probably  no  two 
persons  would  entirely  agree  in  making  out  such  a  list.  But, 
with  the  exception  of  a  very  few  words  necessary  to  give  a 
little  more  freedom  in  forming  exercises,  nothing  has  been 
admitted  which  does  not  appear  in  English.  Some  English 
derivatives  included  will  be  found  beyond  the  comprehension 


VI 


phefach. 


of  young  pupils.  Nevertheless,  if  the  Greek  primitives  are 
fixed  in  mind,  some  inkling  of  the  meaning  of  these  hard 
words  will  enter  also.  It  will  delight  the  child  to  discover 
that  a  long  word,  which  looked  so  difficult,  really  has  some- 
thing about  it  that  he  can  grasp;  and  when  he  gets  old 
enough  to  comprehend  the  idea  which  the  hard  word  stands 
for,  a  simple  reminder  that  hypothesis,  for  instance,  means 
underputting  —  supposition,  will  make  that  word  at  once  a 
part  of  his  intellectual  property.  The  dividing  line  between 
purely  technical  terms  and  those  which  have  passed  into 
literature  is  often  difficult  to  determine.  A  few  of  the  former 
class  can  do  no  great  harm.  And  those  who  take  up  the 
study  of  any  branch  of  science,  after  a  faithful  use  of  this 
book,  will  find  themselves  already  in  possession  of  a  large 
fraction  of  the  Greek  words  which  are  found  in  scientific 
nomenclature. 


In  preparing  the  second  edition  every  line  has  been  care- 
fully scrutinized,  and  few  pages  have  escaped  change.  Some 
derivatives  and  many  explanations  of  derivatives  have  been 
added,  and  one  Greek  word  got  rid  of  that  is  not  used 
in  English.  The  exercises  have  been  slightly  enlarged, 
and  it  is  hoped  otherwise  improved.  For  the  roughness  still 
remaining  in  them  the  peculiar  restrictions  of  the  vocabulary 
must  serve  as  an  excuse. 

It  seems  clearly  my  duty  to  repeat  the  statement  of  the 
preface  to  the  first  edition,  that  the  idea  of  this  book  and  its 
general  plan  were  first  suggested  by  Mr.  Henry  Holt.  Despite 
his  disclaimer  (printed  without  my  knowledge  in  a  note  to 
the  first  edition,  and  suppressed  at  my  urgent  request  in  this 
one),  it  remains  true,  that  if  the  little  volume  accomplishes 
anything,  to  him  primarily  the  credit  will  be  due ;  although 
the  writer  is  alone  responsible  for  the  working  out  of  the 
plan  in  detail,  a  proceSvH  which  naturally  involved  ooDsider- 
iibl«  modification  and  development  of    the  original  germ. 


PREFACE. 


vu 


Material  has  been  taken  freely  from  the  Hadley-Allen  Greek 
Grammar,  and  from  various  dictionaries  and  other  works 
which  it  is  hardly  necessary  to  mention  by  name.  Cordial 
thanks  are  due  to  Professor  B.  Perrin  for  valuable  assistance, 
and  also  to  Mr.  Henry  Holt,  Professor  T.  D.  Seymour,  and 
Professor  B.  G.  Wilder  for  helpful  criticism  and  suggestions. 

Tale  College,  October,  1889. 


■e: 


CONTENTS. 


Introduction.    Why  every  one  should  know  something 

of  Greek •         • 

I.  Writing,  Pronunciation,  Transliteration    . 

II.   The  Article       .         .         •         • 

III.  Nouns  :  First  or  A-Declension  .         .         .         • 

IV.  aVerbs:     Present    Indicative    and    Infinitive 

Active 

V.   A-Declension :  Second  Class  of  Feminines 

VI.   A-Declension :  Masculines         .        .        . 

VII.    ODeclension :  Masculines  and  Feminines 

VIII.   ODeclension;  Neuters 

IX.    Additional  A-  and  0-Stems        .... 

X.   Adjectives  of  the  Vowel  Declension  .        . 

XI.   O-Verbs:    Present    Indicative    and    Infinitive 

Middle  and  Passive 

XII.   Consonant  Declension ;  Stems  in  -k-  and  -y-      . 

XIII.  Consonant  Declension  :  Stems  in  -r-,  -8-,  -O- 

XIV.  Consonant  Declension :  Stems  in  -v  and  -p-       . 
XV.   Consonant  Declension:   Neuter  Stems  in  -ar- 

and  -ta-.     IIoXvs    ...••• 
XVI.   Consonant  Declension  :    Stems  in  -i-  and  -cv-. 

AvvafULL  ,..••• 
XVII.    Ml- Verbs :  Tt^/xt  and  AiSo)^    . 
XVIII.   Mt-Verbs  :  "larrjfxi  and  Kepawvfu      . 
XIX.   The  Verb  ^rj^;  the  Adjective  Has 
English-Greek  Vocabulary      . 
Greek-English  Vocabulary 
Index  of  English  Derivatives 


PAGE 


1 

7 
14 
16 

22 
26 
29 
38 
39 
43 
48 

56 
63 
68 
74 

79 

86 
93 
100 
106 
113 
119 
127 


\ 


\i 


•    ( 


I   » 


<         1 


THE   GREEK  IN   ENGLISR 


INTRODUCTION. 

WHY  EVERY  ONE  SHOULD  KNOW  SOMETHING 

OF  GREEK. 

E  v^ERY  person  who  begins  this  book  is  supposed 
to  have  already  studied  Latin  a  little.  Now  before 
going  very  far  in  the  study  of  Latin,  every  student 
must  have  begun  to  notice  that  a  great  many  Latin 
words  looked  like  English  words.  Not  exactly  like 
English  words,  perhaps ;  and  of  course  it  was  found 
that  many  more  Latin  words  were  quite  unlike 
English,  and  were  rather  hard  to  remember  because 
their  forms  were  new  and  strange.  And  yet  it  was 
plain  that  rex^  reg-is^  was  somewhat  like  reg-al ; 
and  miles^  milit-is^  like  milit-ary ;  virgo^  virgin-is^ 
like  virgin;  animal  like  animal;  Stella  like  con- 
stella-tion ;  agricola  like  agricul-ture  ;  and  a  great 
many  other  resemblances  of  the  same  kind  ap- 
peared as  the  study  continued.  In  cases  like 
these,  too,  the  English  words  not  only  look  and 
sound  like  the  Latin  words,  but  there  is  plainly 
some  connection  in  meaning  also.     For  instance, 


v^ 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


I*' 
I 


\l 


t 

'  agrSfcnltilr^  is  the  work  of  agricolae^  farmers;  a 
constellation  is  made  up  of  a  number  of  stellae, 
stai^si;  templum  means  temple;  virtuous  means 
having  virtus^  virtue  ;  "  my  paternal  house  "  means 
the  house  of  my  father^  pater :  and  so  on.  Of 
course  such  a  great  number  of  resemblances  in 
both  form  and  meaning  of  words  could  not  possi- 
bly be  accidental.  There  must  be  some  reasonable 
explanation ;  and  the  most  natural  one  is  that  one 
language  inherited  or  borrowed  words  from  the  other. 
As  Latin  is  some  centuries  older  than  English, 
plainly  English  must  be  the  borrower  in  this  case. 
And  now,  on  tracing  back  the  history  of  our  tongue 
a  few  centuries,  we  see  beyond  question  that  our 
explanation  is  the  true  one :  that  there  was  a  time 
when  the  people  who  spoke  English  —  and  espe- 
cially those  who  wrote  English  —  felt  a  need  of 
more  words,  and  that  they  took  the  words  they 
wanted,  in  great  part,  directly  from  Latin. 

One  might  ask.  Why  did  these  people  go  to  the 
Latin  rather  than  to  any  other  language  to  borrow 
words  ?  Or,  indeed,  why  did  they  not  make  their 
new  words  out  of  the  stock  which  English  already 
had,  by  putting  together  the  old  words  in  new  com- 
binations? For  that  was  the  way  in  which  the 
Germans,  for  instance,  and  the  Greeks,  and  the 
Romans  to  some  extent,  made  the  new  words 
which  they  wanted.  To  answer  such  questions 
fully  would  take  too  much  time,  and  might  not  be 
easy;  but  a  part  of  the  reasons  can  be  quickly 
given. 


INTRODUCTION. 


8 


f 


I 


England  had  been  conquered  by  the  Normans, 
who  spoke  a  form  of  French.  Although  the  con- 
querors could  not  compel  the  mass  of  the  people 
to  learn  French,  yet  they  were  strong  enough  in 
numbers  and  influence  to  bring  into  English  a 
great  many  French  words.  The  English  lan- 
guage, then,  at  the  time  we  speak  of,  had  become 
mixed,  as  the  people  had ;  and  the  new  part  of  the 
language,  like  the  new  part  of  the  people,  was 
French.  Now  French  is  mainly  derived  from 
Latin  —  is  a  sort  of  corrupted  or  changed  form 
of  Latin ;  and  everybody  was  used  to  that  kind  of 
Latin  words  in  every-day  speech.  This  circum- 
stance would  of  itself  naturally  open  the  door  a 
little  way  for  other  Latin  words. 

Then  again  the  old  Latin  was  at  that  time  a 
sort  of  common  tongue  for  all  educated  people. 
Everybody  who  studied  at  all  studied  Latin ; 
everybody  who  could  read  at  all  read  Latin  ;  books 
were  generally  written  in  Latin  all  over  Europe  as 
well  as  in  England.  As  Latin,  then,  was  so  gen- 
erally understood,  a  speaker  or  writer,  if  he  wanted 
a  new  or  more  dignified  word,  might  very  natu- 
rally help  himself  to  a  Latin  one.  This  went  on 
until  our  language,  especially  the  part  of  it  used 
in  serious  and  thoughtful  speech  and  writing,  is 
quite  largely  borrowed  from  the  language  of  the 
Romans ;  and  besides,  the  custom  of  thus  borrow- 
ing and  forming  new  words  has  become  firmly 
fixed,  and  the  process  is  still  going  on.  And  this 
is  one  great  reason  why  the  study  of   Latin  in 


.iji  Ml  ir^iiiwaw— 


I 


4  THK  anKKK  ly  BNOLISIL 

school  is  so  neoossar)\  No  one  can  know  English 
well  without  knowing  something  about  Latin. 
Every  one  who  begins  the  study  of  this  book  can 
already  partly  see,  from  his  or  her  own  experience, 
the  truth  of  thi^i  statement* 

And  with  Gi*eek  the  case  is  pretty  much  the 
same.  Some  Greek  words  luwe  come  into  Engliiih 
through  Latin.  For  the  Romans  learned  much 
of  their  civilizration  from  the  Greeks.  The  very 
alphabet  was  taught  them  by  the  Greeks,  whose 
hterature  the  Romans  translated  and  imitated; 
and  along  with  every  art  or  science  partly  or 
wholly  learned  from  Greece — such  as  painting, 
sculpture,  geometry,  medicine,  architecture  — 
there  came  into  the  language  a  larger  or  smaller 
numlxir  of  Greek  words  connected  with  that 
branch  of  knowledge.  These  words,  then,  were 
a  part  of  the  Latin  language,  and  were  taken 
thence  into  English  as  readily  as  other  Latin 
words. 

Besides  this,  for  several  hundred  years  now 
Greek  and  Latin  have  been  studied  together  a 
great  deal.  This  was  natural,  because  the  civili- 
zation which  our  ancestors  learned  from  the  Ro- 
mans was  so  largely,  as  was  just  said,  Greek  in 
its  origin.  People  saw  tliat  it  was  worth  while  to 
go  back  to  the  source,  and  become  acquainted  at 
first  hand  with  the  works  of  that  remarkable  })eople 
with  y  tioim  tbg  fnfptm  U  ttc  utikm  wwad  tqgM* 
Bneiw  iftcr  tt«  tiilMi  #f  ImMrwiac  ObMli 


1     1 


'i 

I 


r 


lyTuoDVimoN,  6 

ural  to  take  a  step  farther  and  borrow  from  the 
Greek  directly.  This  step  was  made  all  the  easier 
because  new  compounds  and  derivatives  were  not 
freely  made  in  Latin,  but  in  Greek  they  were 
made  with  the  greatest  freedom.  Thus  it  came 
alK)ut  that  if  Latin  could  not  give  just  the  word 
desired,  nor  Greek  either,  two  Greek  words  would 
be  put  together  into  a  new  word  that  no  Greek 
ever  heard  of.  Many  of  our  scientific  terms,  like 
therm&meter  and  Ulephone^  are  of  this  last  sort 

In  all  these  ways,  then,  Greek  words  have  come 
over  into  English ;  and  however  much  we  might 
wish  to  get  them  outv,  we  cannot  do  it.  In  fact 
new  ones  are  all  the  while  being  brought  in,  and 
our  need  for  new  words  will  probably  continue  for 
a  long  time  to  be  8upi)lied  largely  from  Greek. 
The  only  thing  for  us  to  do  is  to  learn  these  words 
as  soon  as  we  can,  if  we  wish  to  undowtand  what 
thinking  people  are  tiUking  about'.  With  some  of 
them  we  make  a  partial  acquaintance  pretty  early. 
ArUhTMlicj  yeography^  poetry^  mwnc,  telephone^ 
typey  diahrrnm  —  these  all  came  from  Greek ;  and 
all  readt^rs  of  this  page  have  some  idea  of  what 
these  words  mean.  But  one  has  a  better  idea  of 
tlieir  meaning  if  he  knows  also  what  the  Greek 
words  mean.  Besides,  it  is  very  interesting  to 
follow  words  back  to  their  origin  —  to  know,  for 
instancct  just  what  \a  the  original  meaning  of  hdio- 
^pf^  ^^t^ft^^  (7Mfyr,  tr§pif^  iryff^i.  uwl  #  V^  otf 
aikms  ntooiM.  €rm  tlm^  cot  wmy  kM^  aJriA^  m 


^Buegassss 


^i^  -^ 


\\ 


6  THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 

And  then,  as  one  comes  to  read  more,  and  tries  to 
find  out  what  wise  people  are  thinking,  and  all 
sorts  of  people  are  talking  about,  scores  of  less 
familiar  words  taken  from  Greek  present  them- 
selves —  some  among  them  not  very  short  —  which 
one  must  understand  clearly  in  order  to  know  at 
all  what  the  writer's  thought  is. 

Thus  it  becomes  necessary  to  learn  something  of 
Greek,  if  we  wish  to  know  our  own  language.  In 
order  to  think  the  thoughts  which  are  expressed  by 
these  words  of  Greek  origin,  and  in  order  to  tell 
others  our  thoughts,  we  must  learn  enough  of 
Greek  to  become  familiar  with  those  words.  And 
all  of  us  whose  mother-tongue  is  English  ought 
not  only  to  be  proud  of  our  language  and  its 
splendid  literature :  we  ought  also  to  desire,  and 
do  our  best  to  gain,  the  power  of  using  our  mother- 
tongue  correctly  and  easily. 

This  book  is  intended  to  help  toward  that  end. 


A  ) 


i 


1] 


ALPHABET. 


I.  WRITING,  PRONUNCIATION,  TRANSLITERA- 

TION.i 


ATiPHABET. 

1.  Greek  is 
four  letters : 

written  with  the  following  twenty- 

Form. 

Name. 

Sound. 

A        a 
B     •   fi 

/3r]Ta 

alpha 
beta 

a  in  father 
h 

r       7 

A        S 

rydfifia 
SeXra 

gamma 
delta 

gin  go 
d 

E            € 

z     r 

€  ylrJXov 

epsilon 
zeta 

e  in  met 
dz  or  z 

H        17 

0     e  d^ 

OfjTa 

eta 
theta 

e  in  prey 
th  in  thin 

I      t 

i&ra 

iota 

%  in  machine 

K            K 

A        X 

Kourrira 
Xdfi^Sa 

kappa 
lambda 

k 
I 

M       fi 

flV 

mu 

m 

1  Sufficient  explanation  —  and  that  often  means  a  great 
deal  of  explanation  —  should  always  be  given  in  class  before 
the  pupils  are  required  to  learn  a  lesson.  The  alphabet  must 
of  course  be  memorized  at  the  beginning.  For  the  rest  of 
this  chapter  it  will  be  enough  to  read  it  over  in  class  with 
explanatory  comments  (a  process  which  may  require  two  or 
three  recitation  hours),  and  then  go  on  to  Chapter  II.  Abun- 
dant opportunity  for  practice  in  writing,  pronunciation,  and 
transliteration  will  be  furnished  by  the  declensions  and 
exercises. 


8 


THE  GBEEK  IN  JSNGLlSIt. 


[2- 


6] 


PRON  UNCIA  TION. 


9 


Form. 

Name. 

Soand. 

N 

V 

vv 

nu 

n 

a  . 

1 

f* 

xi 

X 

0 

0 

0  fil/cpov 

omicron 

0  in  obey 

u 

TT 

in 

pi 

P 

p 

p 

po) 

rho 

r 

X 

O-  9 

aiyfia 

sigma 

8  in  see 

T 

T 

rav 

tau 

t 

T 

V 

V  'y^TKov 

upsilon 

{  French  u 
\  German  il 

a> 

* 

<f>t 

phi 

ph 

X 

X 

chi 

German  ch 

^ 

t 

^jri 

psi 

pa 

o 

to 

&  fjL€ya 

omega 

0  in  no 

a.  At  the  end  of  a  word  9  is  written ;  elsewhere,  cr. 

2.  In  ancient  times  only  the  capitals  were  used ; 
but  as  writers  tried  to  make  the  letters  in  the 
easiest  way,  they  gradually  changed  the  capitals 
to  the  smaller  forms,  and  now  both  are  used.  It 
was  said  in  the  Introduction  that  the  Romans 
learned  the  alphabet  (a\(f>a  firjra^  or  A  B  C)  from 
the  Greeks.  This  occurred  at  a  time  when  some 
of  the  capitals  had  slightly  different  forms  from 
those  here  given;  and  our  alphabet  was  borrowed 
from  the  Latin,  with  some  changes.  Hence  many 
of  our  letters  are  like  the  Greek,  but  not  all. 

a.  By  marking  in  the  list  and  writing  out  a  few  times 
those  Greek  letters  which  are  unlike  the  English  equivalents, 
the  pupil  can  memorize  them  without  much  difficulty.  Copy- 
ing out  the  Greek  names  of  the  letters  in  Greek  characters 
will  also  be  useful.     Observe  that  the  Greek  name  of  each 


^ 


letter  begins  with  the  sound  of  that  letter.  Observe  also  the 
force  of  our  word  delta  from  the  shape  of  the  capital  letter, 
and  how  it  happens  that  the  phrase  '*  alpha  and  omega" 
means  the  beginning  and  the  end,  and  that  iota  means  a  very 
small  quantity.     (Jot  is  a  corrupted  form  of  iota.) 

3.  Every  letter  (except  c  subscript ;  see  5,  5)  is 
sounded :  there  are  no  silent  letters. 

4.  Of  the  vowels,  e  and  0  are  always  short  in 
quantity — that  is,  were  pronounced  by  the  Greeks 
in  less  time  than  the  long  vowels ;  17  and  co  are 
always  long  —  that  is,  had  more  time  given  them 
in  pronunciation.  The  others,  a,  t,  u,  are  some- 
times long  and  sometimes  short.  In  this  book  the 
long  a,  Z,  V  will  be  printed  with  a  straight  mark 
over  the  letter  ;  short  a,  f,  v  will  be  left  unmarked. 

5.  The  diphthongs  QSt-^doyyoL  double  sounds; 
see  96,  1)  are 

€C,  01,  aV,  €V,  ov, 


ac, 
a. 


VI. 


a.  Originally  the  sounds  oithe  diphthongs  were 
made  by  simply  pronouncing  the  separate  vowels 
closely  together,  in  one  syllable.  But  some  of  the 
diphthongs  are  not  usually  sounded  so  now.  We 
may  pronounce 

at  like  i   in  jine^  av  like  ow  in  now^ 

€c  like  ei  in  rein^^  ev  like>w  in  feud^ 

'    01  like  oi  in  oi7,  ov  like  ou  in  you, 

VL  like  we. 
a,  ?7,  (p  are  pronounced  like  a,  77,  w,  as  if  t  were 
not  there. 

1  Many,  however,  pronounce  ct  like  ei  in  height. 


10 


THE  GTtEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[6- 


9]        BBEA THINGS.  —  SYLLABLES.  --ACCENT.      11 


/ 


!• 


I  i 


b.  This  silent  ^  written  below  the  other  letter, 
is  called  c  subscript  (Latin  sub-seriptus^  tvritten 
below}.  When  the  first  vowel  of  a  diphthong 
containing  c  subscript  is  written  as  a  capital,  t  is 
written  on  the  line :  fllAHI  =  '[IcSr}  =  oJS^. 

6.  The  consonants  are  pronounced  like  the  corre- 
sponding English  consonants,  with  two  or  three 
exceptions,  as  follows : 

a.  Gamma  (7)  before  k,  7,  ;)^,  or  f  is  sounded 
like  n  in  anger,  ink,  and  is  represented  by  n  in 
English  words  from  the  Greek :  ajKvpa  (Latin  an- 
cora),  anchor.  When  sounded  in  this  way,  7  is 
called  7  nasal  (Latin  nasus,  nose},  because  all  the 
breath  used  in  making  the  sound  comes  out  through 
the  nose.  For  the  same  reason  fi  and  v  are  called 
nasals. 

b.  Chi  (;^)  is  now  pronounced  like  German  ch, 
and  English  has  no  corresponding  sound.     It  is 
between  the  sound  of  k  and  that  of  h.     One  should 
begin  by  pronouncing  it  as  A,  and  gradually  learn   ' 
to  roughen  the  sound  sufficiently. 

c.  Zeta  (^)  is  pronounced  like  dz. 

BREATHINGS. 

7.  With  every  initial  vowel  is  written  one  or 
the  other  of  two  marks  called  breathings.  The 
rough  breathing  (')  is  pronounced  like  our  h ;  the 
smooth  breathing  (')  is  not  pronounced  at  all,  but 
merely  shows  that  the  vowel  to  which  it  belongs 
has  no  h  sound  before  it.  These  breathings  are 
written  over  a  small  vowel,  but  at  the  left  of  a 


i' 


A 


J 


capital:  wpa  (Latin  hora}  season, '^Ofirjpo^;  Homer. 
Initial  p  also  has  the  rough  breathing :  prjrcop 
(^rhetor}  a  public  speaker.  Double  p  is  sometimes 
written  pp,  and  is  represented  by  rrh  in  English : 
Kardppov^;  catarrh. 

a.  A  diphthong  takes  the  breathing  over  the 
second  vowel:  avro^^  self.  But  c  subscript  does 
not  take  the  breathing:  '^AcBrj^;  Hades,  wS^  song. 

SYLLABLES. 

8.  Every  vowel  or  diphthong,  with  or  without 
one  or  more  consonants,  makes  a  separate  syllable : 
v-yl-et-a  health.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is 
called  the  ultima  ;  the  next  to  the  last,  the  penult ; 
the  syllable  before  the  penult,  the  antepenult. 

ACCENT. 

9.  The  accented  syllable  in  Greek  is  always  marked,  and 
for  this  purpose  three  signs,  called  accents,  are  used.  These 
are :  the  acute  accent,  '  Trora/xo?, 

the  circumflex  accent,  '^   toJ  worafiS, 
the  grave  accent,  ^    tov  Trora/Aov. 

These  different  accents  mark  differences  in  the  ancient 
Greek  pronunciation,  but  all  are  now  commonly  pronounced 
alike. 

a.  These  accents  are  written  over  the  vowel  of  the  accented 
syllable ;  they  are  written  over  the  second  vowel  of  a  diph- 
thong, unless  the  second  vowel  is  t  subscript.  If  the  vowel 
has  a  breathing  also,  the  acute  and  the  grave  are  placed  at 
the  right  of  the  breathing ;  the  circumflex  is  placed  above  the 
breathing :  o  fUKpov,  01,  w.  If  the  accented  vowel  is  a  cap- 
ital, the  accent,  as  well  as  the  breathing,  stands  just  before 
it :  "O/xrjpo^. 


12 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[10— 


10.  a.  The  acute  accent  can  stand  only  on  one  of  the  last 
tliree  syllables ;  the  circumflex  can  stand  only  on  one  of  the 
last  two  syllables,  and  only  on  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong. 

Note.  —  When  a  vowel  has  the  circumflex  accent,  there- 
fore, it  must  be  long,  and  the  mark  of  length  will  be  omitted 
in  this  book. 

h.  If  the  ultima  has  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong,  the  acute 
cannot  stand  on  the  antepenult  nor  the  circumflex  on  the 
penult. 

11.  The  general  rules  of  accent,  accordingly,  are : 

(1)  A  word  with  short  vowel  in  the  ultima,  if  accented 
a.  on  the  antepenult,  has  the  acute:  8iWa. 

h.  on  a  short  vowel  in  the  penult,  has  the  acute  :  Imro^;. 

c.  on  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  in  the  penult,  has  the  cir- 
cumflex: y\<xKT(Ta. 

d.  on  the  ultima,  has  the  acute :  ^eos. 

(2)  A  word  with  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  in  the  ultima, 
if  accented 

a.  on  the  penult,  has  the  acute :  (To<fiid,  yXwo-crry?. 
h.  on  the  ultima,  sometimes  has  the  acute  and  sometimes 
the  circumflex :  <f>(ovrj,  <f>u)vri%. 

12.  Final  -at  and  -ot,  although  long,  have  the  effect  of  short 
vowels  on  the  accent  of  the  penult  and  antepenult :  yAwcro-at, 
avOpisyiroi, 

13.  An  acute  on  the  ultima  changes  to  the  grave  when  fol- 
lowed by  another  word  in  connected  discourse :  r-qv,  but  r^v 
(Spdv.     This  is  almost  the  only  use  of  the  grave  accent. 

TRAKSLITERATION. 

14.  Transferring  words  from  a  foreign  alphabet 
into  our  own  —  respelling  them  in  our  own  letters 
—  is  called  transliterating  them  (Latin  trans, 
across,  and  I  iter  a,  letter^.  The  natural  way  of 
doing  this  would  seem  to  be  simple.  And  for  the 
most  part  the  transliteration  of  Greek  words  into 


141 


TRANSLITEBA  TION. 


13 


English  is  in  fact  simple ;  but  a  few  points  need 
especial  notice. 

In  the  Introduction  it  was  said  that  some  Greek 
words  have  come  into  English  through  Latin,  hav- 
ing been  first  borrowed  by  the  Latins.  Nearly  all 
these  words  had  been  Latinized,  that  is,  sufficiently 
changed  in  form  to  seem  at  home  among  other  Latin 
words,  before  they  were  Anglicized  or  taken  into 
English.  Thus  a  fashion  was  set,  as  we  might  say, 
to  be  observed  by  any  later  comers  from  Greek 
into  English.  Again,  not  only  were  Greek  and 
Latin  studied  together,  but  for  a  long  time  Greek 
was  studied  only  through  Latin.  The  Greek  gram- 
mars were  written  in  Latin,  and  in  Greek  vocabu- 
laries and  dictionaries  the  definitions  were  given 
in  Latin.  Thus  the  fashion  of  treating  borrowed 
Greek  words  as  the  Romans  did  —  that  is,  of  Latin- 
izing them  —  was  firmly  established.  At  present 
this  custom  is  not  so  closely  followed  with  new 
words ;  but  generally,  in  tracing  out  connections 
between  Greek  and  English,  we  are  obliged  to 
notice  what  changes  are  due  to  this  Latinizing 
process.  All  these  changes  will  be  fully  illus- 
trated, later,  in  connection  with  the  derivatives  in 
which  they  are  found ;  but  for  convenience  the 
following  are  summed  up  here : 

a.  Zeta  (f),  though  pronounced  dz,  is  repre- 
sented by  z. 

b.  Kappa  (/c)  is  usually  represented  by  c,  which 
in  Latin  had  the  sound  of  our  k,  although  in  later 
borrowings  the  more  natural  k  is  often  used. 


14 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[16- 


c.  Upsilon  (y),  if  not  part  of  a  diphthong,  is 
represented  by  y.  When  the  Romans  did  most  of 
their  borrowing,  v  had  a  sound  between  that  of  i  in 
machine  and  u  in  rule  (nearly  the  sound  of  French 
u  or  German  «),  and  that  sound  had  no  represen- 
tative in  the  Latin  alphabet.  Therefore  the  Latins 
transferred  the  Greek  letter  itself,  and  T  is  the 
origin  of  our  letter  Y.  Of  course  the  sound  of  our 
1/  IS  very  different ;  and  after  spelling  the  word  in 
the  Latin  way,  we  pronounce  it  in  the  English  way. 

d.  Chi  (x)  is  represented  by  eh,  which,  however, 
we  generally  pronounce  in  English  like  k. 

e.  The  diphthong  ai  is  represented  by  ae,  which 
in  Latin  had  nearly  the  same  sound  with  at,. 

f.  The  diphthong  et,  usually  becomes  i,  sometimes 
e ;  for  in  the  Roman  period  the  pronunciation  of 
«  changed  from  that  of  Latin  e  to  that  of  Latin  i. 

g.  The  diphthong  oi  becomes  oe,  which  in  Latin 
had  nearly  the  same  sound  as  oi.  To  represent 
better  our  own  pronunciation,  this  oe  is  often 
changed  to  e. 

h.  The  diphthong  ov  becomes  u  in  words  that 
have  come  through  Latin,  and  ou  in  words  taken 
from  Greek  directlv. 

i.  Iota  subscript  is  omitted  in  transliteration. 

h.  It  was  mentioned  above  (7)  that  ^  becomes 
rh^  and  pp  becomes  rrh. 

II.  The  Article. 

15.  In  Greek,  as  in  Latin,  nouns,  pronouns,  ad- 
jectives, and   verbs  are   inflected;    that   is,  their 


18] 


THE  ARTICLE. 


15 


forms  are  varied  according  to  their  relations  to 
other  words- in  the  sentence.  For  example,  leav- 
ing other  parts  of  speech  till  later,  nouns  or  sub- 
stantives are  declined  to  denote  case  and  number; 
and  adjectives,  including  the  article  6,  ^,  to  the, 
are  declined  to  denote  gender  also. 

16.  Greek  has 

a.  Three    genders:     masculi7ie,    feminine,    and 
neuter. 

b.  Three  numbers  :  the  singular  for  one  object, 
the  plural  for  more  than  one,  the  dual  for  two. 

c.  Five  cases:  the  nominative,  genitive,  dative, 
accusative,  and  vocative. 

17.  The  definite  article  o,  77,  to  the  is  declined  in 
three  genders  and  numbers,  and  in  all  the  cases 
but  the  vocative.  As  the  article  may  be  used  with 
any  noun,  it  will  be  best  to  take  this  up  before  the 
nouns.     It  is  declined  as  follows : 


18. 


Sing.  Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 

Dual  N.  A. 
G.  D. 

Plu.    Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


M. 

f 

0 

TOV 


Tft) 

« 

TOV 


TCO 

Tolv 

t 
01 

tS}v 

Tol^ 
TOV<i 


F. 

r 

V 
Tri<; 

TTJ 
T7]P 

T(0 
TOCP 

at 

TCOV 

Tal^ 
Ta<i 


N. 

TO 
TOV 

TcS 

i 

TO 

TCO 
TOLV 

Ta 

TCOV 

TOL(; 

Ta 


16 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[19- 


19.  The  forms  6, 17,  ot,  at  (with  a  few  other  words  of  one 
syllable)  have  no  accent  of  their  own,  but  lean  forward  upon 
the  following  word,  and  hence  are  called  proclitics  (jrpo  for- 
ward and  kXlvu)  lean).  The  article  the  in  English,  unless 
emphasized,  is  a  proclitic,  as  are  many  other  words.  Thus 
when  we  say,  *'  The  boy  has  a  jack-knife;  he  whittles,"  the^ 
a,  and  he  have  no  separate  accent,  but  lean  forward  on  the 
following  words,  very  much  as  Greek  proclitics  do. 

It  will  assist  in  remembering  the  forms  to  note  that  all 
genitives  and  datives  have  the  circumflex^  and  that  all  other 
forms  (except  the  proclitics)  have  the  acute.  In  the  dual 
number,  which  was  not  much  used,  the  nominative  and 
accusative  of  all  genders  are  alike,  and  also  the  genitive  and 
dative  of  all  genders. 

Note.  —  From  this  point  on,  unremitting  practice  is  neces- 
sary both  in  writing  and  in  reciting  paradigms.  In  preparing 
these  the  pupil  should  first  copy  out  2i  small  group  of  forms 
(say  the  singular  only,  or  even  less),  taking  especial  pains 
about  the  written  accent  and  pronouncing  each  form  aloud; 
then  should  close  the  book  and  write  the  same  group  from 
memory.  Next  let  him  compare  his  work  with  the  printed 
forms,  correct  all  mistakes,  and  try  again;  and  so  on,  until 
the  work  can  be  written  correctly  from  memory.  Then  let 
him  take  another  group  of  forms,  not  so  large  but  that  one 
or  two  trials  will  enable  him  to  master  it;  finally  let  the 
whole  paradigm  be  taken  together.  The  first  attempts  may 
perhaps  be  discouraging,  because  the  alphabet,  though  really 
difiering  so  little  from  our  own,  is  unfamiliar.  But  a  few 
days  of  careful  practice  will  make  a  vast  difference,  and  soon 
an  entire  paradigm  can  be  mastered  at  one  trial. 

III.  Nouns:  First  or  A-Declension. 

20.  The  stem  of  a  noun  is  that  part  to  which  the 
case-endings  are  added  in  declension.  Noun-stems 
(and  also  adjective-stems)  are  classified  according 


23] 


NOUNS:  FIBST  OR  A-DECLENSION. 


17 


as  they  end  in  (1)  a,  (2)  0,  (3)  a  consonant  or  l 
or  V.  These  three  classes  of  stems  are  declined  in 
three  slightly  different  ways,  named  from  the  last 
letter  of  the  stem: 

The  A'Declension^  or  First  Declension. 

The  O- Declension^  or  Second  Declension. 

The  Consonant-Decle7ision^  or  Third  Declension. 

21.  All  stems  ending  in  -a-  belong  to  the  a-declen- 
sion.  The  feminines  have  no  case-ending  in  the 
nominative  singular.    The  following  are  examples: 

22.  7]  (a)/>a-)      r]  (6ed-^      r]  (^K€(f)a\d'^ 

season  sight  head 

Sing.  Nom.      ^         &pd  Bed  K€<f>a\i] 

Gen.        Trj<;     &pd<;  6ed^  K€(f>a\fj<; 

Dat.        rfj       &pa  did  Ke(f)aXy 

Acc.        Tr)v     &pd-v  Oed'V  Ke(f>a\i)'V 

Voc.        0)         &pd  ded  K€(f>a\7] 

Dual  N.  A.V.  Tft)      cjpd  Bed  Ke(f>(iKa 

G.  D.      Tolv    &paLV  Oeaiv  Ke(f>a\alv 

Plu.    Nom.  al  aypat  Beat,  /c€(f>a\aL 

Gen.  T&v  (hpcov  Oecov  K€(f>a\S)v 

Dat.  Ta?9  &paL^  Oeac^i  /c€(f>a\ai(; 

Acc.  Ta9  &pd^  Oid^  Ke(f>a\d<: 

Voc.  &  aypat  6  eat  K€(f>a\al 

a.  For  the  accent  of  rrjv,  tw,  ras,  see  13.  For  <Spat,  see  12 
and  11,  (1)  c.     (In  wpaiv  and  (Spats,  at  is  not  final.) 

6.  With  the  vocative  the  interjection  co  0  is 
often,  though  not  always,  used.  It  should  not 
usually  be  translated. 

23.  All  words  of  the  a-declension  are  declined 


18 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[24- 


alike  in  the  dual  and  plural.  In  the  singular  all 
feminines  originally  had  -d  in  the  nominative,  and 
were  declined  like  Spa.  But  in  many  words  this 
-a  has  been  shortened  in  the  nominative^  accusa- 
tive^ and  vocative^  singular.  Hence  there  are  two 
classes  of  feminines.  In  this  section  we  take  up 
only  the 

24.  First  Class  of  Feminines.  —  These  have  a 
long  vowel,  a  or  tj,  in  the  last  syllable  throughout 
the  singular. 

a.  Long  d  is  retained  after  e,  ^,  or  p;  otherwise 
it  is  changed  to  rj  throughout  the  singular. 

Accent  of  Nouns. 

25.  The  accent  of  a  noun  remains,  in  all  the  forms,  on  the 
saine  syllable  as  in  the  nominative  singulaVy  or  as  near  that 
syUable  as  the  general  rules  of  accent  (10,  11,  12)  allow. 

26.  An  accented  ultima  in  general  takes  the  acute  ;  but 

27.  In  the  genitive  and  dative  of  all  numbers  a  long  ultima, 
if  accented^  takes  the  circumflex. 

28.  Further,  in  the  a-declension  only,  the  genitive  plural 
always  has  the  circumflex  on  the  last  syllable. 

a.  This  is  because  the  stem-vowel  -d  and  the  ending  -<ov 
were  contracted  to  one  syllable,  so  that  -acov  became  -cuv. 


7]  afCfjLT],  -rj(; 
7]  fiordvrj,  -179 


29.   Vocabulary.^ 

summit^  prime  (acme). 
grass^  herb  (botan-y). 


1  It  will  assist  in  learning  the  vocabularies  to  read  over 
carefully,  in  connection  with  each  one,  the  corresponding 
section  of  Notes  on  Derivatives,  at  the  end  of  each  chapter; 
those  notes,  however,  should  not  be  required  to  be  learned 
until  after  the  preceding  Exercises  have  been  translated. 


30] 


NOUNS:  FIRST  OR  A-DECLENSION. 


19 


ypd(f>co 

iv}  prep.  w.  dat.  only, 

T]  Oedy  -a? 

7]  /€€(f>a\7],   -^9 

iraXtv,  adv., 

irepi,  prep.  w.  gen., 

riy  pron., 

77  (ubr]y  'Tj^ 

r)  a>pd,  -a9 


earthy  land  (ge-ography). 

I  write  (geo-graph-y). 

in. 

I  have. 

youth  (Hebe,  goddess  of  youth). 

sights  shoiv  (thea-tre). 

head  (cephal-ic). 

again^  back  (palin-ode). 

about^  concerning. 

what  ? 

song^  ode. 

season^  appointed  time  (hour). 


30.  Exercises. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Trjf;  oJ8^9.^  2.  iv  rrj  yj}.  3.  Tafc9  Pordvai^ 
TTj^  7/)9.  4.  Tr]v  ^ordvrjv  e^co.  6.  /cecpaXrjv  €)(^co. 
6.  TL^  ypd(f)co  ;^  7.  rl  ypdcfyco  irepl  rS)v  ^oravcop ; 
8.  irepl  rr](;  yrjf;  jpdcfxo  (ge-o-graph-y).  9.  irepl  rSyv 
aypcjv  ypd(f)co   (hor-o-graph-y).       10.  iv  rfj  rj^y  rfj^; 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  In  the  prime  of  youth.  2.  I  write  songs  in 
the  season  of  youth.  3.  I  write  about  the  season 
of  the  herbs.  4.  I  write  the  song  again  (palin-ode). 
5.  What  have  I  in  my  (Greek  idiom  in  the}  head 

1  Proclitic :  see  19. 

2  Unless  other  directions  af€^ven,  the  cases  may  be  trans- 
lated as  in  Latin. 

3  Ti  never  changes  its  acute  accent  to  the  grave. 

*  The  mark  of  interrogation  in  Greek  is  like  our  semicolon. 


18 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[24— 


alike  in  the  dual  and  plural.  In  the  singular  all 
feminines  originally  had  -a  in  the  nominative,  and 
were  declined  like  copd.  But  in  many  words  this 
-a  has  been  shortened  in  the  nominative^  accusa- 
tive^ and  vocative^  singular.  Hence  there  are  two 
classes  of  feminines.  In  this  section  we  take  up 
only  the 

24.  First  Class  of  Feminines.  —  These  have  a 
long  vowel,  a  or  97,  in  the  last  syllable  throughout 
the  singular. 

a.  Long  d  is  retained  after  e,  t,  ot  p;  otherwise 
it  is  changed  to  rj  throughout  the  singular. 

Accent  of  Nouns. 

25.  The  accent  of  a  noun  remains,  in  all  the  forms,  on  the 
same  syllable  as  in  the  nominative  singular,  or  as  near  that 
syllable  as  the  general  rules  of  accent  (10,  11,  12)  allow. 

26.  An  accented  ultima  in  general  takes  the  acute  ;  but 

27.  In  the  genitive  and  dative  of  all  numbers  a  long  ultima, 
if  accented,  takes  the  circumflex. 

28.  Further,  in  the  a-declension  only,  the  genitive  plural 
always  has  the  circumflex  on  the  last  syllable. 

a.  This  is  because  the  stem-vowel  -d  and  the  ending  -(ov 
were  contracted  to  one  syllable,  so  that  -amv  became  -civ. 


7]  aKfJLT],  -rj<; 
7]  fiordvTjy  -779 


29.   Vocabulary.^ 

summit^  prime  (acme). 
grass ^  herb  (botan-y). 


1  It  will  assist  in  learning  the  vocabularies  to  read  over 
carefully,  in  connection  with  each  one,  the  corresponding 
section  of  Notes  on  Derivatives,  at  the  end  of  each  chapter; 
those  notes,  however,  should  not  be  required  to  be  learned 
until  after  the  preceding  Exercises  have  been  translated. 


30] 


NOUNS:  FIRST  OB  A-DECLENSION. 


19 


ypd(f>(o 

iv,^  prep.  w.  dat.  only, 

rj  Oedy  -a? 

T]  K€(f)aXr]y  -^9 

TToXiv,  adv., 

TrepLy  prep.  w.  gen., 

t/,  pron., 

T)  ajdr]y  -779 

^  copd,  -a9 


earthy  land  (ge-ography). 

I  write  (geo-graph-y). 

in. 

I  have. 

youth  (Hebe,  goddess  of  youth). 

sights  shoiv  (thea-tre). 

head  (cephal-ic). 

again^  back  (palin-ode). 

about.,  concerning. 

what  ? 

song^  ode. 

season^  appointed  time  (hour). 


30.  Exercises. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Tr)9  ft>8>)9.^  2.  ev  rfi  yy.  3.  rat^;  fiordvacfi 
T^9  7^)9.  4.  rrjv  fiordvrjp  e^co.  5.  K€(f>a\rjv  €)(^co. 
6.  TL^  ypd(f>co  ;^  7.  rl  ypd(f)co  irepl  rcov  ^oravcop  ; 
8.  ire  pi  Tr]<;  7^9  ypd(j)co  (ge-0-graph-y).  9.  Trepl  tmv 
(hpayv  ypd(j)co    (hor-0-graph-y).       10.   eV  rrj  tj/Stj  rrjf; 

yfj^. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  In  the  prime  of  youth.  2.  I  write  songs  in 
the  season  of  youth.  3.  I  write  about  the  season 
of  the  herbs.  4.  I  write  the  song  again  (palin-ode). 
6.  What  have  I  in  my  (Greek  idiom  in  the^  head 

1  Proclitic :  see  19. 

2  Unless  other  directions  al'IPglVen,  the  cases  may  be  trans- 
lated as  in  Latin. 

3  Tl  never  changes  its  acute  accent  to  the  grave. 

*  The  mark  of  interrogation  in  Greek  is  like  our  semicolon. 


20 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[31- 


(en-cephal-on)  ?      6.   I   write    an    ode    about   the 
show. 

31.   Notes  on  Derivatives?- 

1.  Hints  have  been  given  as  to  a  few  English 
derivatives  from  words  in  the  above  vocabulary. 
For  instance,  acme  comes  to  us  with  only  the 
change  of  a:  to  c  (see  14,  6),  and  its  meaning  is 
about  the  same  as  that  of  arcfirj. 

2.  Botan-ist  and  botan-ic  remind  one  at  once  of 
botan-y,  and  usually  we  need  not  stop  to  mention 
more  than  one  member  of  a  family  in  which  the 
family  resemblance  is  so  plain.  We  shall  see  later 
that  the  endings  -ic  and  -ist  are  themselves  of  Greek 
origin,  -ic  making  adjectives  and  -ist  making  nouns 

1  The  entire  class  should  have  ready  access  to  at  least  one 
unabridged  English  dictionary,  as  the  Imperial,  Webster's  or 
Worcester's.  Before  leaving  a  chapter  all  English  deriva- 
tives—the words  partly  or  wholly  in  fuU-face  type  —  should 
be  looked  up,  and  the  connection  between  their  present  mean- 
ings and  the  Greek  originals  clearly  understood.  In  many 
cases  this  connection  is  explained  in  this  book ;  but  often  it 
is  only  hinted  at  and  left  to  be  brought  out  in  class.  This 
course  has  been  followed  because  a  little  independent  work 
on  the  part  of  the  scholar,  constantly  directed  and  aided  by 
suggpstions  and  questions  from  the  teacher,  is  the  best  possible 
method  of  arousing  interest  and  fixing  indelibly  in  the  pupil's 
mind  just  those  facts  which  it  is  the  object  of  this  book  to 
teach.  To  repeat,  then,  constant  use  of  the  dictionary,  with 
constant  help  and  questioning  on  the  part  of  the  teacher, 
must  on  no  account  be  neglected. 

With  some  classes  it  may  be  thought  best  to  omit,  until 
review,  a  few  derivatives  whose  connection  with  their  primi- 
tives is  not  easily  made  clear. 


31] 


NOUNS:  FIBST  OR  A-DECLENSION. 


21 


that  denote  persons  (see  78,  11,  and  86,  11).  We 
shall  also  find  that  often,  as  in  botan-y,  the  final 
vowel  of  a  Greek  stem  is  dropped  off,  for  ease  of 
pronunciation,  in  derivatives  or  compounds. 

3.  Ge-,  meaning  earth  or  land^  appears  in  several 
words,  such  as  ge-o-logy  (see  50,  II.,  6),  ge-o-metry 
(see  57,  4),  apo-gee  (see  57,  1).  The  -o-  in  ge-o- 
graphy,  geology,  holography,  seems  to  have  no  busi- 
ness there ;  yet  we  shall  find  that  the  same  sylla- 
ble has  been  put  between  the  two  parts  of  a  large 
number  of  compounds,  in  which  it  has  no  more 
meaning  than  a  hyphen.     (See  51,  1.) 

4.  Graph-ite  is  a  substance  used  in  pencils  for 
writing,  the  syllable  -ite  being  our  remnant  of  xin 
ending  which  denotes  merely  a  vague  connection. 
(Compare  dynam-ite,  94.)  Graph-ic,  in  some  of  its 
uses,  goes  back  to  another  meaning  of  ypdcpco, 
namely,  draw  or  paint.  We  shall  meet  the  syl- 
lable -graph-  frequently.     For  -gram,  see  91,  4. 

5.  En-cephal-on,  a  more  learned  and  scientific 
name  for  hrain^  shows  the  change  of  k  to  ^,  and 
shows  also  the  form  eephal-  which  Ke^aXrj  takes  in 
several  scientific  words,  such  as  cephal-ie,  pertain- 
ing to  the  head^  a-cephal-ous  (see  60,  3,  5),  headless^ 
eephal-algia  (see  110,  2),  headache. 

6.  TiaXcv  appears  in  palin-drome  (see  51,  3),  palin- 
genesis (see  96,  3),  and  palim-psest.  In  paUm-psest 
(jraXifM-ylrrjcrTov^  the  m  takes  the  place  of  n  for 
ease  of  pronunciation  before  a  jt?-sound ;  the  second 
part  is  from  a  verb,  yjrdcoy  meaning  to  rub.  Parch- 
ment was  costly,  and  hence  was  often  used  a  second 


22 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[32— 


time,  the  old  writing  being  rubbed  off  again  ;  but 
this  process  still  left  faint  traces  of  the  older  writ- 
ing, and  some  very  valuable  ancient  books  have 
been  recovered  from  palimpsests. 

7.  Several  rather  common  words  contain  tpSi]  as 
one  element;  such  are  mel-ody  (see  100,  8),  par-ody 
(see  46,  5),  pros-ody,  and  rhaps-ody ;  and  also,  with 
a  change  which  obscures  the  form  of  wS/;,  trag-edy 
(rparyaySid,  Latin  tragoedia),  and  com-edy  (fccofjLwBid, 
Latin  eomoedia').  The  significance  of  the  first  part 
of  rhaps-ody,  trag-edy,  and  com-edy  is  uncertain. 

8.  From  &pd  was  taken  the  Latin  hora;  and 
from  hora,  through  a  French  form,  is  derived  the 
English  hour.  Then  directly  from  Greek  we  have 
(with  the  inserted  hyphen-like  -o-)  hor-o-loge  (see  51, 
5,  a),  hor-o-scope  (see  74,  9),  hor-o-meter  (see  57,  4). 

IV.  O-Vekbs:  Present  Indicative  and 

Infinitive  Active. 
32.  Present  Indicative  Active. 


Sing.   1    rypd(f)CO 

2  ypd(f>€t^ 

3  ypd(f>€t 

Dual  2  rypdcfyerov 
3  ypdcfyerov 

Plu.    1  ypd(f)o/jL€V 

2  ypd(f>€T€ 

3  ypd(f>ovac 


I  write 

you  write 

he  (she,  it)  writes 

you  (two)  write 
they  (two)  write 

we  write 
you  write 
they  write 


Present  Infinitive  Active. 
ypd(j>eLv  to  write 


35] 


Cl'VEtins. 


23 


33.  Most  Greek  verbs  are  conjugated  in  the 
present  tense  like  ypd(f>co,  and  are  called,  from  the 
ending  of  the  first  form,  w-verbs.  Besides  the 
singular  and  plural  they  have  a  second  and  third 
person  dual,  but  no  first  person  dual. 

a.  The  accent  of  the  verb,  with  but  few  exceptions,  stands 
as  far  from  the  end  of  the  word  as  possible ;  that  is,  on  t\iQ  penult, 
if  the  ultima  has  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong,  otherwise  on  the 
antepenult ,  if  there  is  an  antepenult. 


34. 

aKOvo} 

€v,  adv., 

Tj  laropid,  -a? 

fxavOdvco  (root  fiaO) 

ov,  ovK,  ov^t^  adv., 
^  (T^oXrj,  -t}? 
ar^oXd^Q)  (fr.  a-^oXrj) 
T^Xe,  adv., 

(f)COV€(0  (fr.  (f)C0V7]) 


Vocabulary. 

hear  (acou-stie). 

well  (eu-phony). 

history,  story. 

learn  (math-ematics). 

machine  (mechanic). 

not. 

(1)  leisure,  (2)  school. 

have  leisure. 

at  a  distance,  far  (tele-phone). 

sound,  voice  (tele-phone). 

sound  (phon-ograph). 

hand  (chir-ography). 


35.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
\.     Hrj    firj^avTJ^    rrjXe     rrjv    (f>covr)p    (tele-phone) 


1  Proclitic  (see  19).  The  form  ov  is  used  before  a  consonant, 
ovK  before  a  smooth  breathing,  ovx  before  a  rough  breathing. 

^  Translate,  By  means  of  etc.  The  dative  is  used  in  Greek, 
like  the  Latin  ablative,  to  denote  means  or  cause. 


24 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH, 


[36— 


aKovofiev.  2.  rj  fivX^^^  ''"^^^  ^(ovu^  ypd(f>€L  (phono- 
graph). 3.  iv  rfi  (Txo'^fl  V  X^'^P  JP^<f>^^^  (chir-0- 
graphy)  iiavOdvei.  4.  ov  axo^d^et^  iv  rf}  axo^fj ; 
6.  7)  mStj  €v  ^(oveeL  (eu-phony).  6.  ov  crxo^d^ofMev 
oLKoveiv  TTjv  laropidv.  7.  tL  fiavOdvere  irepl  tt)?  7^9  ; 
8.  al  what  ovK  €v  (j>cov60vaL, 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  machine  writes  at-a-distance  (tele-graph). 
2.  They  have-leisure  in  youth.  3.  What  are  you 
writing?  4.  What  do  you  hear?  5.  They  are 
writing  the  history  (Mstori-o-graph-er)  of  the  ma- 
chines. 6.  They  have  herbs.  7.  We  are  writing 
the  sounds  (phon-o-gr aphy ) .  8.  We  hear  songs  in 
the  season  of  the  herbs.  9.  Are  you  learning  the 
song  again  ? 

36.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Acoustic,  pertaining  to  hearing^  is  a  clipped 
form  of  dKovcTLKo^,  an  adjective  with  an  ending 
which  we  shall  meet  frequently.  The  addition  of 
an  -8  gives  the  noun  acoustics,  the  science  of  sounds^ 

as  heard, 

2.  The  adverb  ev  appears  in  the  form  eu-,  with 
the  force  of  well,  easy,  good,  in  a  considerable 
number  of  words  besides  eu-phony.     (See  51,  5,  a ; 

60, 1.) 

3.  Story  is  merely  a  corrupted  form  of  history, 
but  has  come  to  have  a  slightly  different  meaning. 
We  speak  of  such  forms  as  corrupted  (literally 
spoiled^,  because  at  first  the  change  was  simply  a 


36] 


Cl'VEBBS. 


25 


mistake,  or  blunder,  due  to  carelessness  or  igno- 
rance; but  after  a  while  the  new  form  became 
common,  accepted  by  every  one,  and  general  good 
usage  makes  a  word  entirely  respectable  and  cor- 
rect. These  slight  changes  of  form,  followed 
often  by  a  variation  of  meaning,  are  no  small  part 
of  the  growth  and  development  of  a  language, 
and  the  process  is  all  the  time  going  on. 

4.  Mrjxavi]  also  is  represented  by  two  different 
forms.  First  it  became  in  Latin  machina ;  this 
became  machine  in  French,  from  which  the  word 
was  taken  into  English.  Then  more  directly  from 
Greek  we  have  mechan-ic  (^fjbrjxavtfco^},  mechan-ism, 
with  various  derivatives  and  compounds. 

6.  A  special  meaning  of  cxo^rj  was  leisure  de- 
voted to  study;  this  gave  the  Latin  schola,  from 
which  we  get  schol-ar  (Latin  scholdris^  and  the 
corrupted  form  school.  Scholastic  Qaxo^aa-riKo^}, 
is  from  axo^d^co.  Again,  from  axo^^v  is  derived 
(with  a  changed  but  clearly  related  meaning) 
axoXi^ov  an  explanation,  comment,  scholium.  Scholium 
has  the  Latinized  ending,  -urn  for  -ov.  Finally, 
from  (Txo^^ov  is  derived  scholiast  (axo>^caaTi}si),  a 
commentator,  especially  one  of  those  otherwise 
unknown  commentators  whose  explanations  are 
found  on  the  margins  of  old  Greek  and  Latin 
manuscripts. 

6.  Phonetics  (from  (^covrf)  is  the  science  of  spoken 
sounds,  or  the  sounds  of  the  human  voice,  and  is 
thus  to  be  distinguished  from  acoustics  (see  36, 1). 
Phonetic  ((jxovrjrtKo^;),  is  the  corresponding  adjective. 


26 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[37— 


41] 


A-DECLENSION :  SECOND  CLASS. 


27 


V.  A-Declenston  :  Second  Class  of  Feminines. 


37. 


Sing.  Nom. 

V 

Gen. 

T% 

Dat. 

Ace. 

TTJV 

Voc. 

0) 

DualN.A.V 

.  Tft) 

G.D. 

Tolv 

Plu.  Nom. 

at 

Gen. 

TMV 

Dat. 

Tal<^ 

Ace. 

ra^ 

Voc. 


(O 


7]  (a-<f>aLpd-^  rj 
ball 

Cipaipa 

(T(f>aipd(; 

a(f>aipd 

a^alpa-v 

(Tcpacpa 

(r(f)aipd 
a(f>aipaLV 

ac^alpai 

a(paLpS)V 

a(f>aipat^ 

(Tc^alpd^ 

(T^alpat 


QyXcocrcrd'^  y  (hiaiTd-^ 
tongue 

yX(baaa 

yXcoaarj^; 

ryXcocrar} 

yXcjaaa-v 

yXcoaaa 

yXcoaad 
yXcoaauLV 

yXcoaaac 

yXcoacrcbv 

yXoiaaai^ 

yXcocradf; 

yXcoaaat 


mode  of  life 
Blacra 

hlaira-v 
hlaiTa 

BtaLTd 
StaLTatv 

hiairai 

StaCTMV 

BtaLTd^ 
Blacrat 


38.  The  Second  Class  of  Feminines  of  the  a- 
declension  shorten  long  d  of  the  stem  to  short  a 
in  the  nominative^  accusative^  and  vocative  singular 
only.  In  all  other  respects  these  nouns  are  like 
those  of  the  First  Class  (see  22,  23,  24,  a,  25-28). 

a.  In  all  the  nouns  of  this  class  the  accent  is  recessive,  that 
is,  stands  as  far  from  the  end  as  the  general  rules  of  accent 
allow. 

39.   Vocabulary. 

rj  y^  (oaaa  {^      /  .-^^^  tongue^  (2)  language  (glossa-ry). 

yXcorrajy  -7^9     ) 

77  Siacra,  -779        mode  of  life  (diet). 

^  fjLovaa,  -rji;       Muse. 

y  fiovai/cT],  -rj^     mtisic. 


TTOteO) 

rj  acfyatpa^  -a9 
rj  vyleia,  -a9 
97  '^ifiatpa,  -tt9 


make  (poet). 

ball^  sphere. 

healthy  good  health  (Hygeia). 

she-goat  (chimaera). 


40.  Exercises. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  ^^'x^ovat  <T(f>aLpav.  2.  y  'x^ifiaipa  rrjv  /jLOvaLfcrjv 
vLKoveu  3.  al  fiovaau  fjLovaLKrjv  iroLeovai.  4.  ri 
e(7TL(y)^  (is^  T)  Biacra  rrj^  'X^Lfxaipd^  ;  6.  y  yfj  iart 
a(f>alpa.  6.  al  /JLovaaL  ov  fiavdapovat  Ta9  t?79 
Xi'f^aipd^;  0)809,  ovSe  (nor^  al  x^f^^^P^^  '^^^  '^^^ 
fiovacjv  ft}8a9.     T.  vyteiav  e^op^ev  ev  rj^rj. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  she-goat  by  her  (Greek  idiom  hy  the; 
compare  35,  I.,  1)  mode-of-life  has  good-health. 
2.  We  are  learning  about  the  mode-of-life  of  the 
muses.  3.  We  hear  the  language  of  the  muse. 
4.  They  are  writing  music.  5.  The  language 
sounds  well.  6.  He  is  making  a  ball.  7.  Do  you 
hear  the  music  of  the  spheres  ? 

41,   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  rXwrra  appears,  in  the  sense  of  language^  in 
poly-glot  (poly-  means  many ;  see  91,  12).  In  later 
Greek  yXwaaa  came  to  mean  an  obsolete  or  foreign 

1  After  iart  and  also  after  any  word  ending  in  -at,  v  is  often 
added,  whether  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel  or  with  a 
consonant.    This  is  called  v  movable. 


28 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[41- 


word^  requiring  explanation,  and  then  an  explana- 
tion given  for  sucli  a  word.  In  this  sense  we  have 
the  form  gloss,  and  the  derivative  glossary.  The 
name  yXcorrL^^  from  yXcorra^  was  given  (probably 
from  the  resemblance  in  shape)  to  the  mouthpiece 
of  a  musical  instrument  like  our  clarinet;  and 
Greek  physicians  applied  the  same  term  to  the 
narrow  upper  end  of  the  windpipe  or  larynx  (see 
76) ;  the  latter  is  the  meaning  of  glottis. 

2.  The  muses  were  goddesses  of  literature  and 
the  arts,  and  everything  over  which  they  presided 
was  included  under  fiovai/c?].  Later,  /jlovo-lk/j  was 
restricted  to  the  art  of  music,  as  we  understand 
that  term. 

3.  Hemi-sphere  has  for  its  first  part  rjfii-,  a  Greek 
prefix  meaning  half,  related  to  the  Latin  prefix 
semi',  and  never  used  as  a  separate  word.  Hemi- 
forms  part  of  many  English  scientific  terms.  In 
sphere  and  its  derivatives,  ae,  the  Latin  equivalent 
of  at,  has  been  replaced  with  e.  The  change  was 
made  because  the  letter  e  represents  more  simply 
the  sound  which  was  given  to  ae  in  the  English 
pronunciation  of  Latin.  So  in  diet  from  Slatra, 
and  in  chimera. 

4.  'Ty leia  was  personified  as  a  goddess  of  health, 
Hygeia,  the  English  word  representing  the  later 
shortened  Greek  form.  From  the  same  word  we 
have  hygiene  and  hygienic. 

5.  The  chimaera  was  a  fabulous  fire-spouting 
monster,  with  a  goafs  body,  a  lion's  head,  and  a 
serpent's  tail.     Hence  the  word  is  often  used  for 


43] 


A'DECLENSION :  MASCULINES. 


29 


any  imaginary  object  of  fear.  It  is  usually  spelled 
chimera,  e  taking  the  place  of  ae,  as  in  sphere  and 
diet.  The  adjective  chimerical  often  does  not 
imply  fear,  but  only  that  the  thing  is  fanciful  and 
improbable  or  impossible. 


VI.  A-Declension 

:  Masculines. 

42. 

6   (^Kpl 

,Td'^      6  < 

(^^oped-^     6 

(TToXtra-^ 

judge 

north-wind 

citizen 

Sing.  Nom. 

0 

icpLTrj-^ 

^oped'^ 

7ro7dTr]-<; 

Gen. 

TOV 

KpiTOV 

fiopeov 

ttoXltov 

Dat. 

Tft) 

KpLTfl 

^oped 

TToXfry 

Ace. 

TOV 

KpLTrj'V 

^oped-v 

ttoXlttj-v 

Voc. 

KpLTa 

fioped 

TToXtTa 

DualN.A.V. 

TO) 

KpLTa 

• 

iroXtTd 

G.D. 

Tolv 

KpcTalv 

TToXtTaiV 

Plu.   Nom. 

oi 

KpLTai 

iroXlTaL 

Gen. 

TOJV 

KpLTMV 

iroXiTcov 

Dat. 

T0Z9 

KptTal<i 

TToXtTacf; 

Ace. 

T0U9 

/cpLTa<; 

TToXfrd^ 

Voc- 

CO 

KptTai 

1 

TToXLTat 

43.  Masculines  of  the  a-declension  are  like  the 
feminines,  except  in  the  following  particulars : 

a.  They  take  the  case-ending  -9  in  the  nomina- 
tive singular. 

b.  The  genitive  singular  ends  in  -ov. 

c.  Nouns   in   ttj^  have   in   the   vocative  singu- 
lar -Ta, 


go 


THE  GREEK  IN  iJNGLtSn. 


[44— 


44.   Vocabulary. 

fidWco  throw. 

6  ^oped^y  'Ov  north-wind  (Boreas). 

6  Seo-TTOTTj^;,  -ov^  master^  owner  of  slaves  (despot). 

/cptvco  judge. 

6  KpLTTj^'i  -ov  judge  (critic). 

irapd^  prep.  w.  dat.,  at  the  side  o/,  beside  (jpsx^-graph). 

irapa-fidWco  compare  (literally,  throw  beside^. 

f  /        .        ( poet  (literally,  maker,  from 

o  TTotrjrm,  -ov        {  \   ^        ^ 

I       TToteco). 

f)  irapa'^oXrjy  -rjf;     comparison^  illustration^  parable. 

o  ttoXitt;?,  -ov  citizen  (polit-ics). 

uTrep,  prep.  w.  ace,   beyond  Okj^ex-critical). 

f         /o  '-x-x  i  outdo^  excel  (literally,  throw  be- 

^  \      yond^. 

f  f        P  -x  '     "     \  ^a:c?gss,    extravagance    (literally, 
^  (      over-shooting^^  hyperbole. 

45.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.    'H    'xelp   Tov   irdydrov   ^dXKei    rrjv   (r(f>alpav. 

2.  irapa  rrj  wSf)  ypd(f>o/jL€v  (para-graph)  /jLovaifcrjV. 

3.  6  BeaTroTT]^;   ov  a'XpXdi^ei  ^dWeiv   rrjv   acfyalpav. 

4.  Tr)v  yrfV  acfyalpa  irapa^dXkofiev.  6.  S)  Beairoray 
ov/c  d/€ov€t<;  rrjv  rov  Kptrov  (f>(ovr]V ;  6.  ol  TroXlrat 
ovK  aKovovai  rrjv  Trapa^oXrjV,  7.  rco  Kpira  ypd(f)€Tov 
irepl  Ti}9  T(bv  ttoXItmv  virep^oXrjc;.  8.  ri  virep  rov 
^opedv  (hyper-borean)  eari  (is^  Latin  est^ ; 


1  Aeo-TTOTrjf;  draws  the  accent  back  in  the  vocative  singular : 
SecrTroTa. 


46] 


A-DECLENSION :  MASCULINES. 


31 


II.   Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  citizens  are  throwing  ball  again.  2.  The 
master  compares  the  head  of  the  poet  to  a  ball. 
3.  Have  we  a  master  ?  4.  Citizens,  you  hear  the 
voice  of  the  judges.  5.  We  do  not  judge  the 
citizens.  6.  They  throw  the  ball  beyond  the 
master.  7.  We  are  comparing  the  judges.  8. 
Citizen,  you  are  learning  the  language  of  the 
poets. 

46.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  From  the  root  of  Kp\vco  and  Kpirrj^  is  derived 
the  adjective  KpiriKo^  capable  of  judging^  which 
gives  us  critic,  critical,  criticise,  criticism ;  also  Kpi- 
TrjpLov  criterion,  and  Kpiat^;  judgment^  trials  which 
gives  us  crisis. 

2.  From  iroXtTq^  we  have  not  only  politics,  po- 
litical, politic ;  but  also  (through  iroXireid^  -a?  ad- 
ministration^  form  of  government)  polity,  policy,  and 
the  still  farther  shortened  police. 

3.  The  derivatives  of  fidWco  show  the  original 
form  of  the  root  with  one  X,  and  often  with  a 
changed  to  o,  as  in  irapa^oXrj  and  virep^oXrj. 
In  parable  the  (?,  even,  has  been  dropped,  but 
the  adjective  parabolical  is  nearer  to  the  Greek 
form.  Another  compound  of  ^dXXco  is  Sia-^dXXco 
slander^  in  which  the  force  of  tlie  separate  parts 
is  not  very  clear.  From  Bca-fiaXXo)  come  hia^oXrj 
slander  and  Bcd^oXo^  slanderer.  This  latter  was 
used  especially  as  a  title  of  Satan,  and  has  been 
corrupted  into  devil;  but,  as  with  parabolical,  the 


32 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[46— 


adjective  diabolical  was  taken  more  directly  from 
the  Greek  form. 

4.  Poet,  poetry,  and  poesy  come  to  us  through 
the  Latin  forms  poet  a  and  poesis^  which  have  lost 
the  L  of  the  original  Greek  form.  In  Greek  itself, 
however,  irotew  and  its  derivatives  were  often 
written  and  pronounced  Troeo),  etc.,  without  i. 

5.  In  a  par-ody  (TraptpSid^  from  irapd  and  cJS/; ; 
see  29  and  31,  7)  the  words  of  some  writing  are 
altered  just  enough  to  give  them  a  laughable  turn, 
while  they  still  remind  one  of  the  original.  Thus 
in  reading  the  parody  one  seems  to  hear  the  origi- 
nal, usually  a  poem,  sounding  beside  it.  Para- 
graph was  used  at  first  to  denote  a  mark  or  note 
written  beside  the  page,  in  the  margin.  Now  it 
denotes  especially  the  sign  %  used  to  denote  a 
break  in  the  composition,  and  the  beginning  of  a 
new  line  farther  than  usual  from  the  margin ;  and, 
finally,  the  word  stands  for  a  section  or  division 
thus  begun.  Para-  is  an  element  in  many  scien- 
tific words. 

6.  The  preposition  virep  has  the  meaning  beyond 
in  a  few  English  derivatives;  thus  hyper-borean, 
literally  bei/ond  the  north-wind,  and  so  in  the  ex- 
treme north.  Secondly,  in  a  number  of  derivatives 
the  element  hyper-  denotes  an  extreme  degree,  or 
too  much,  of  something,  as  in  hyper-critical.  (Com- 
pare with  this  the  related  Latin  word  super-,  as  in 
super-natural,  super-sensitive.) 


1 


i 


■ 


49J 


47. 


O- DECLENSION:  MASCULINES. 

VII.  0-DECLENsio:^r:  Masculines 

Peminines. 

o  (avOpayiro-)      6  (fjLvOo-) 


33 


AKD 


man 


Sing.  Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 

DuaiN.A.V. 
G.D. 

Plu.    N.V 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


avOpcoiTO-^ 

avOpGOTTOV 

avdpcoTTfp 

av6pco7ro-v 

avOpcoire 

dv0pco7r(o 
avOpcoTTOCV 

avOpcoiroL 
avOpcoTTcop 

avdpCOTTOi^ 

dp0p(O7rov<; 


tale 
fJLvdo-^ 
fivOov 

flV0O-V 

fivOe 
fjLvdco 

fJLvdoC 

fivdcov 
/jLv6oc(; 

fJLvdoV^ 


r]  (JiZo-) 

road 

ooov 

00(0 
oSO'V 

oSi 
oSco 

OOOLV 

oSoi 
oocov 

00049 
oSoU9 


48.  All  stems  of  the  second  declension  end  in  o. 
Masculines  and  feminines  ^  are  declined  alike. 

a.  The  rules  for  the  accent  cf  nouns,  given  in  25-27,  apply 
to  all  declensions. 


o  avOpcoTTO^,  -ov 
6  ^io^y  -ov 
^Lyv(li}aK(o 

dva-yLr^V(li}(TK(0 
O  SpOfJLQf;,   'OV 


49.    Vocabulary. 

man  (anthropo-logy). 

life  (bio-graphy). 

perceive,  learn  to  hnoiv  (Gno-stic) 

read  (originally  know  again^ 

re-cognize^, 
a  running,  ra(?/(palin-drome). 


^  ^]^^,  number  of  feminine  -o-  stems  is  not  large,  and  only 
one,  oZ6^^  is  used  in  this  book. 


34 


Kai 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH, 


[50— 


O  KOCfJLO^;,    -ov 

fcoajjbeco 
Xeyeo 

o  X6yo<;^  -ov  (fr, 
Xeyco^ 

6  /JLV0o^,  -ov 

rj  0009,  'OV 

opdoD 

0  (f)LXo^f  -ov 

6  '^povo^;^  -ov 


and, 

S(l)  order,  (2)  ornament^  (3)  the 
universe^  world  (cosmos). 
adorn  (cosmetic). 
speak,  tell. 
(1)    word,     (2)    talk,   discourse, 

(3)    account,    description    (an- 

thropo-logy). 
tale,  legend,  myth. 
7*oad,  way  (odo-meter ;    see  meter, 

54). 
see  (cosm-orama). 
friend  (phil-anthropy). 
time  (chrono-logy). 
soul  (Psyche). 


50.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Ol  TTOtTjral  wSa?  iroieovaL.  2.  rov  fiiop  rov 
KpLTov  ypd(f>oiJL€V  (bio-giaphy ) .  3.  (f>L\o<;  ypd(f)ev 
Tcov  ^covS)v  Xoyov  (phon-0-logy)  /cal  rcov  fivOcov  Xoyov 
(mytho-logy).  4.  ^1X09  avOpcoircov  (phil-anthrop-ist) 
icTTopLdv  ypd(f)€t.      5.  rj  yXcocraa  rov  Kpirov  €v  Xeyet. 

6.  dvayiyvaDCTKOfiev  rrj^  '\Jrv'^i]<;  Xoyov  (psych-0-logy) . 

7.  o  7roXirr]<;  ov  yiyvcoafceL  rov  'x^povov,  8.  opdere 
Tov  Spo/jLov  iv  rfi  6So5  ;  9.  tou9  fMv6ov<^  roov  irocrjrayv 
dvayLyvdxT/cere  iv  rfj  a^oXfj.  10.  e^et  6  KocrfMo^ 
(3d  meaning)  yjrv^'^v  ;^  11.  €v  Xeyet  irepl  rov  (say 
his^  (fylXov. 


1  Certain  ancient  thinkers  believed  that  it  has. 


61] 


O -DECLENSION :  MASCULINES. 


35 


II.   Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  A  citizen  of  the  world  (cosmo-polite)  is  read- 
ing an  account  of  the  times  (chrono-logy).  2.  The 
poets  speak  and  we  hear.  3.  They  are  reading 
the  tale  of  the  chimera.  4.  We  hear  the  words 
of  friends.  5.  They  read  an  account  of  life  (bio- 
logy) ^^^  ^^  account  of  the  earth  (ge-o-logy ;  see 
31,  3).  6.  The  poet  is  making  an  ode  about  the 
soul,  7.  The  poets  adorn  the  legends  and  write 
poems  (iroirnjuara^.  8.  The  life  adorns  the  man. 
9.  Do  you  see  a  man  beside  the  road?  10.  He  is 
speaking  about  the  race  of  a  man  and  a  she-goat. 


51.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  In  bio-graphy,  bio-logy,  cosmo-polite,  and  chrono- 
logy, it  is  plain  that  the  letter  0-  at  the  end  of  the 
first  part  of  the  compound  belongs  to  the  stem  of 
that  part,  —  yS^o-,  Koafio-,  'xpovo-.  The  n\imber  of 
compounds  in  which  the  first  member  was  an  o- 
stem  was  very  large,  so  large  that  the  0-  came  to 
be  carelesslj'-  regarded  as  a  mere  device  for  con- 
necting the  two  parts  of  any  compound.  Hence 
the  '0-  was  often  inserted  in  other  cases,  where  it 
is  only  a  sort  of  spoken  hyphen,  connecting  the 
two  members,  although  the  first  member  may 
have  ended  originally  in  a-  or  a  consonant.  (See 
31,  3.) 

2.  The  root  of  yiyvcoo-fcco  is  yvo-  or  yvco-,  related 
to  our  word  know,  in  which  the  k  was  formerly 
pronounced.    From  this  root  was  formed  yvGxrrcKo^^ 


36 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[51- 


"knowing,^^  whence  our  word  Gnostic.  An  ancient 
religious  sect  were  called  Gnostics,  because  they 
claimed  to  be  particularly  "  knowing "  on  certain 
subjects.  (For  agnostic  see  60,  3,  6.)  Gnome  is 
also  a  derivative  of  jcyvcoa/cco  ;  certain  imaginary 
beings  were  so  called  because  they  were  supposed 
to  know  where  mineral  treasures  were  hidden  in 
the  earth. 

3.  Ap6/iio<;  appears  in  palin-drome  (see  31,  6), 
and  dromedary,. which  comes  to  us  through  a  late 
Latin  form  dromedarius^  -edarius  being  a  combina- 
tion of  derivative  endings. 

4.  K6af^o<;  appears  in  English  in  two  meanings, 
which  at  first  sight  seem  not  very  closely  con- 
nected. First,  from  the  meaning  ornament^  we 
get,  through  Koafjieco  and  fcoa/jLTjTLKOf;^  the  word  cos- 
metic. Secondly,  the  visible  universe  was  called 
K6afio<;^  as  being  an  orderly^  well-arranged  system  ; 
and  in  this  sense  we  have  cosmos,  from  which  cos- 
mic and  cosmical  naturally  follow.  In  cosmo-polite, 
cosmopolitan  the  first  part,  instead  of  including  the 
entire  universe,  is  restricted  to  the  various  coun- 
tries of  the  earth.  So  in  cosm-orama,  of  which  the 
second  part  is  from  opdco. 

5.  a.  The  syllable  -log-,  representing  \0709  in 
the  sense  of  discourse^  account^  description^  appears 
in  many  names  of  sciences,  like  those  in  the  Exer- 
cises. In  fact  this  element,  preceded  by  an  -0-,  is 
so  familiar  that  there  has  even  been  formed  from 
it  the  separate  word  ology,  used  most  often  in  the 
plural  as  a  rather  humorous  name  for  the  sciences. 


51] 


O-BECLENSION :  MASCULINES. 


37 


Eu-logy  (see  36,  2)  is  good  talk^  a  speaking  welly 
about  one ;  that  is,  praise.  Eu-loginm  is  a  longer 
form  of  the  same  word ;  eu-logize  is  the  correspond- 
ing verb.  A  pro-logue  Qrrpo  before^  Latin  pro^  is 
something  spoken  before^  as  an  introduction  to  a 
poem  or  play.  (Compare  epilogue,  68,  6.)  A  hor- 
o-loge  (c5/?a,  see  31,  8)  is  an  instrument  which  tells 
the  time.  Further,  X0709  signifies  that  power  of 
the  mind  which  is  exhibited  in  speech,  namely, 
reason.  From  \0709  in  this  sense  we  have  logic 
(XoyLKi]^y  the  science  of  reasoning. 

b.  The  preposition  am,  up  or  along^  has  taken  on 
a  variety  of  meanings,  the  connection  of  which  is 
not  so  plain  as  might  be  wished.  Like  Latin  re- 
(seen  in  re-pel^  re-novate^  re-new^  it  signifies  back 
and  again.  Thus  from  ava-ypd(f)0)  tvrite  back  or 
again^  we  have  ana-gram,  a  word  or  phrase  formed 
by  re-writing  in  a  different  order,  or  transposing^ 
the  letters  of  another  word  or  phrase.  So  ana- 
chron-ism  is  a  transposition  or  confusion  of  the  time 
Qxpovosi)  of  events.  In  ava-yiyoovaKa)  the  preposi- 
tion has  the  force  of  again^  and  likewise  in  ana- 
baptist, one  who  holds  that  those  baptized  in  infancy 
should  be  re-baptized  when  older  (^fiaTrrl^a)  bap- 
tize). Then  in  two  or  three  phrases  dvd  was  used 
in  the  sense  of  according  to  ;  one  of  these  was  dva 
\6yovy  in  which  \0709  also  has  a  highly  specialized 
sense,  that  of  reckoni7ig  or  ratio.  From  this  phrase 
was  formed  the  adjective  dvakoyo^  analogous,  ap- 
plied to  things  which  are  to  each  other  according 
to  a  certain  ratio^  or  which  are  alike  in  their  rela- 


38 


TBE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[51- 


tions  or  circumstances.  The  neuter  form  dvdXoyov 
gives  us  analogon  or  analog-ue,  an  analogous  word 
or  thing  ;  analogy  (^dvakoyio)  is  the  relation  between 
analogous  things. 

The  prefix  ana-  is  found  in  many  scientific  terms, 
and  should  not  be  confused  with  negative  an-,  for 
which  see  60,  3,  b. 

c.  The  preposition  /caTa  down  is  also  much  used 
in  composition  with  meaning  more  or  less  changed. 
Thus  KaTd'\oyo<;  a  telling  down,  as  it  were,  that  is 
list,  cata-logue;  cata-comb  Qkvijl^t],  -779,  somethinff 
Jiollow),  underground  passages  where  the  dead 
were  deposited. 

6.  PMI0-,  phil-,  and  -phile  are  the  representatives 
of  ^/Xo9,  as  in  phil-anthropy,  love  of  mankind,  phil- 
harmonic (dpfMovui  harmony),  philter  ((f)L\Tpov  love- 
charm,  or  means  of  producing  love),  philo-Turkish, 
Turco-phile,  Slavo-phile,  phil-heUenic  f  EXXt;!/  a 
G-reek),  and  others.  Philo-logy  is  etymologically 
fondness  for  words  or  for  language;  hence  the 
study  of  words  or  of  language,  or  in  a  larger  sense, 
the  study  of  literature  and  all  that  is  expressed  in 
language. 

7.  Xpovo^  gives  us  chronic,  applied  to  diseases 
that  have  lasted  a  long  time,  and  chronicle,  a  narra- 
tive of  events  in  the  order  of  time. 

8.  Psychic  (y^rifx^LKo^)  is  our  adjective  from 
'^vxrj'  Psych-o-logy  is  the  science  which  treats  of 
the  nature  and  powers  of  the  soul. 


54] 


0-DECLENSlON :  NlSUTEBS. 


89 


VIII. 

O-Declknsion: 

Neuters. 

52. 

TO 

Cfl€TpO-) 

TO   (jTKrjTTTpO') 

\ 

measure 

Staff 

Sing.  Nom. 

\ 
TO 

fJL€TpO'V 

O-KrjTTTpO-V 

Gen. 

TOV 

fieTpov 

CKriTTTpOV 

Dat. 

TCO 

fJL6Tp(p 

(TKriTrTpcp 

Ace. 

TO 

fl€TpO-V 

aKrJTTTpo-v 

Voc. 

(0 

fJL€TpO'V 

(TKTJTTTpO'V 

Dual  N.  A. V. 

TO) 

fl€Tp(0 

(TfCT^TTTpeO 

G.D. 

Tolv 

fieTpOLV 

aKrjlTTpOLV 

Plu.   Nom. 

Td 

fi€Tpa 

afcrJTTTpa 

Gen. 

tS>v 

fl6Tp(0]J 

afCTJTTTpCOV 

Dat. 

TOl^ 

flCTpOL^ 

(TKrjTrTpOL^ 

Ace. 

Ta 

fl€Tpa 

(TKrjTTTpa 

Voc. 

& 

fJL6Tpa 

(TKriTTTpa 

53.  Neuters  of  this  declension  differs  from  mas- 
culines only  in  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  voca- 
tive, singular  and  plural.  In  the  singular  these 
cases  take  the  case-ending  -v :  in  the  plural  they 
change  the  stem-vowel  -o  to  -a.  (Compare  Latin 
metrum,  metrd.) 

54.  Vocabulary. 

dirdy  prep.  w.  gen.  only,  from,  away  from  (apo-logy). 
TO  SivSpov,  -ov  tree  (rhodo-dendron). 

Bed,  prep.  w.  gen.,  through  (dia-meter). 

€A:,€^,^prep.w.gen.only,  out  of,  from  (Latin  ex). 

1  ProcUtic  (see  19)  ;  c/c  is  used  before  a  consonant,  c^  before 
a  vowel. 


40 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[66— 


TO  epyov,  'ov 

O  ^\^09,  'OV 

TO  Oedrpov,  -ov 

TO  Oepfiov,  'OV 

TO  fiiTpov,  -ov 

TO  opyavov,  -ov  (related 

to  epyov) 
irepiy  prep,  w.  gen., 

TO  pOOOVy   'OV 

TO  a-KrJTTTpov,  -ou 

TpfrTTCt) 

6  TpOTTO^,  -Oir(£r.  Tpi'TTdd), 


work  (en-erg-y) 

he  (she^  it)  is. 

they  are. 

sun  (helio-trope). 

theatre  {place  of  seeing^  Oea), 

heat  (thenn-al). 

measure  (meter,  metr-ic). 

instrument  (organ). 

ahimt^  eoneeming. 

around  (peri-meter), 

ro9e  (rhodoKlcndrou). 

9taffy  sceptre. 

turn. 

a  turn  (trope). 


55.  The  verb-forms  l(m  atu!  ri<r«,  with  a  few  other  words, 
arc  enclUir^  (from  iv  aucl  kA^vo)  lean) ;  that  Is,  they  iwually 
have  no  accent  of  their  own,  but  le^tn  on  Uie  precedln^i^  wonL 
As  to  accents  In  tliLs  connection  we  have  the  following  rules : 

a.  The  word  before  an  enclitic,  (1)  If  It  has  the  acuu  on 
th«  uUinuit  docs  not  clianice  the  acute  to  the  grave:  -xouyr^i; 
ifrru  (2)  If  It  has  tlio  cireun^^  on  the  penuii,  or  the  acute 
on  the  antepmhU,  it  takes  also  an  aente  on  the  ttltima :  ai^aifia 
ioTiy  Spyavoy  tori. 

b.  An  enclitic  of  ttco  s}/Vables  takes  an  acut^i  on  Ute  ultima^ 
if  the  prec^diriff  won!  has  an  ncuU  on  the  penuU:  poSor  itrrC 

56,  JBxerdseB. 
L  Translate  Into  KngUsh* 

1.  *0    av0pc97ro^  ^j^ei  l)6ta  airo  S^Spov  (rhodo- 


*  Soc  40, 1.,  4,  with  note. 


56] 


O'DECLENSION :  NEUTERS. 


41 


dendron).  2.  6  iv  Ttp  dearpq)^  &vOpco7ro^  €y(ei  aicriTr' 
Tpov.  8.  t/  icTTL  Th  fi^Tpov  Trj<i  ohov  Sea  (dia-mctcr) 
Tov  rjXlov  KaX  to  p^^rpov  Trj(;  68ov  ircpl  (peri-od)  top 
rfKiov  (peri-helion)  ;  4.  iK  tov  opydvov  ycyvaxTfCOfiep 
TO  TOV  Oapp^v  pierpov  (thermo-meter).  5.  o  KpVT7j<; 
Tperrec  Tr]v  (say  Ar«)  fC€(f)a\f)p  arro  tov  7)\iov.  6«  ix 
TOV  fiiov  TT)p  y^v^7)p  ayOpwTTov  yiyptixTKopcif.  7.  tov9 
TpoTTov^i  Tt/^  oSot)  ovj(  opdeTc,  8.  oi  TToiijTai  eitrt 
(fylXoL.  9.  oi  <f>i\oc  cial  Troi'qTaL  10.  ov  Ti}\e  utto 
TOV  de/iTpov  hivtpov  IhtL     !!•  oi  <f>i\o(.  Kwrfi4ova't 

poSoi^  Ti)V  TOV  VOnjTOV  iC€(f>a\t)V.      12.    Ti'  TToUet  TO 

0€pja6v  ; 

XL  Translate  into  Greek* 

1.  You  do  not  perceive  the  measure  of  the  timo 
(chrono-meter).  2.  We  see  roses  in  the  theatres. 
8.  The  iiKin  makes  a  road  around  the  earth  (peri- 
gee). 4.  The  earth  in  far  from  the  suii  (aph- 
elion  ^).  5.  In  work  (energy),  not  in  talk,  is  the 
way  of  the  soul's  health.  6.  [There]  is  a  tree 
beside  tlie  road.  7.  On  the  tree  is  a  rose.  8.  The 
sun  makes  the  ro^e.  9.  I  see  the  hclio-tropc  (to 
i)\iO'Tp6iriov)  and  the  roses.  10.  What  is  the 
measure  of  the  staff?  11.  Tlic  sun  adorns  tlie 
earth  with  roses.  12.  llie  heat  of  the  sun  turns 
baek  tlic  citizen  from  the  road. 


1  Sach  n  phrase  standing  between  the  article  and  its  noun 

modifies  the  nonn. 

«  Before  the  ron^h  brratliini;  iiiri  may  lose  ltd  final  vowel, 
and  then  takes  the  form  d<^*. 


42 


TUB  GEEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


57.  JSfotes  on  Derivatives. 


[67- 


1.  Apology  (jiirO'Xo^ia,  from  airo  and  \6yo^^  is 
literally  a  talking  off^  with  which  are  connected 
apologize  and  apologetic.  Apo-logue,  though  of  the 
same  derivation  exactly,  has  a  curiously  different 
meaning.  Usage  often  proves  stronger  than  ety- 
mology in  fixing  the  significance  of  words.  Apo- 
gee has  7^  for  its  second  part. 

2.  Di-orama  is  from  Si-opdco  (from  Slu  and  opdco) 
to  see  through.  (Compare  cosmoraina,  51,  4,  and 
panorama,  110,  11.) 

3.  Exodus  (e^^-oSo?)  is  from  ef  and  0S09,  with 
Latinized  ending  -us.  Meth-od  (^iieO-oho^^  also  con- 
tains a  fragment  of  0S09 ;  the  first  part  is  the  prep- 
osition [jberd^  which  with  the  accusative  means  after. 
As  airo  before  the  rough  breathing  becomes  a(f>\  so 
fierd  becomes  iJbe6\  Method,  then,  is  primarily  a 
way  after^  or  a  going  after.,  something ;  hence  an 
inquiry^  then  the  systematic  way  of  making  an  in- 
quiry or  investigation. 

4.  The  name  George  is  our  corruption  of  Feci/o- 
7^09,  which  goes  back  finally  to  an  older  form  of 
7^  and  the  root  of  epyov^  and  so  means  earth-worker^ 
tiller  of  the  soil.  In  forming  the  compound,  a  pe- 
culiar change  of  vowels  has  taken  place.  A  similar 
change  has  taken  place  in  geo-metry  Qyewfierpia)^ 
land-measuring ;  for  the  Greek  science  of  geometry 
was  used  originally  for  measuring  land.  For  hor- 
o-meter  (also  containing  fxerpov)  compare  31,  8. 

5.  From   '^\^09   come   various   scientific  terms. 


58] 


ADDITIONAL  A-  AND  O- STEMS. 


43 


such  as  heliacal,  connected  with  the  sun^  and  helio- 
meter,  originally  an  instrument  for  measuring  the 
diameter  of  the  sun. 

6.  Along  with  the  theatre  must  be  placed  amphi- 
theatre. The  preposition  a/i^^'  around,  about,  is 
related  to  Latin  amho,  both.  In  composition  it 
often  means  (1)  on  both  sides,  (2)  double.  The 
latter  is  the  force  of  amphi-  in  amphi-theatre,  and 
also  in  amphi-bious  (yS/09),  having  a  double  life,  that 
is,  in  the  water  and  in  air. 

7.  The  tropic  is  the  apparent  turning-plsLce  of 
the  sun.  Trophy  is  a  corrupted  form  of  rpoiraLov, 
related  to  rpoTro^.  At  the  place  where  the  enemy 
turned  in  flight  during  a  battle,  the  Greeks  piled 
up,  or  fastened  on  a  tree,  part  of  the  armor  taken 
from  the  enemy.  This  remained  as  a  memorial  of 
victory.  (For  variation  of  e  of  rpeTrco  to  0  of  rpo- 
7ro9  compare  fidXXco,  46,  3.) 


f      V 


IX.  Additional  A-  and  O-Stems. 

58.   Vocabulary. 

6  a77e\o9,  -ov  messenger  (angel). 

dyyiXkco  report,  an7iou7ice. 

6  aS€X(f>6<;,  'OV  brother  (Adelphi). 

d  aiiXo^y  -ov  pipe  (hydr-aul-ic). 

eVt,  prep.  w.  ace,  to  (after  verbs  of  motion), 

d  ^€09,  -oO^  a  god,  Grod  (theo-logj^). 

horse  (hippo-drome). 


O   LTTTTO^,  'OV 


1  The  vocative  singular  of  O^o^;  is  Uke  the  nominative. 
Compare  Latin  deus,  vocative  deus. 


44 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH, 


[59— 


o  KpvaraWo<;y  -ov 

O  /CVf€\o<^,  -ov 
7)  flOp(f>7],  -9}  9 

TO  fiovaelovy  -ov 

fr.  fiovaa) 
o  TrapaSecao^i^  -ov 
o  iroXefioSf  -ov 
o  7roTaibLO<;,  -ov 
areWco 
a7rO'(TTeW(o 
o  airo-a-ToXo^;,  -ov 
r]  €7rL'aTo\7]y  -{]<; 

0  T07ro<;,  'OV 

TO  VOCOp 

6  (f>6fio^,  -OV 


ice  (crystal). 
circle  (cycle,  cyclone). 
form  (morph-ology). 

house  of  the  muses ^  museum. 

park  (paradise). 

war  (polemics). 

river  (hippo-potamus). 

send, 

send  away, 

envoy,,  ambassador  (apostle). 

letter  (epistle). 

art^  skill  (techn-ology). 

place  (topo-graphy). 

water  (hydr-aulics). 

fear  (hydro-phob-ia). 


59.  Exercises. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.  To  vhcop  pel  (flows)  Sc^  rod  avXov  (hydr-aulic, 
hydr-auHcs).  2.  6pdco  rhv  ririrov  iv  rcS  ttotu^co 
(hippo-potamus).  3.  ol  dSeXcfyoi  <f>L\ot^  (PMl-adelpMa) 
dal.  4.  </>/\o9  ririTcov  (Phil-ip,  ^t\L7riro^)  irepl  rcov 
Toirwv  ypdcf>et  (topo-graphy)  rcbv^  iy  r^  jrapaSeUco. 
5.  0  TTorafib^  ^€l  iv  kvkXco  (en-cycl-ical)  Tvepl  to 
fiovaelov,     6.  6  ^opjd^  ^p,^^,   Kp{,cTTa\\ov  iv  toI^ 

1  The  article  is  omitted  with  a  predicate  noun ;  thus  we  can 
often  distinguish  the  subject  from  the  predicate  noun  when 
they  stand  side  by  side,  as  here. 

2  The  repetition  of  tcuv  shows  that  eV  roJ  TrapaSe.W  belongs 

to  TCWrO)!/.  >.         r  ^  to 


eo] 


ADDITIONAL  A-  AND  0-STEMS. 


45 


TTOTafioc^;.      7.   0  dyyeXo^  opdei  ttjv  tov  deov  fiop(f>riv. 

8.  ol  deol   arCWova-i^v)   dyyeXov^    iirl   dv0pco7rov<;. 

9.  ol  d8€\(f>ot  (Adelphi)  pLav6dvovcn(y)  dvayiryvco- 
aKetv  Ta<;  iiridToXa^  tcov  diroaToXcov.  10.  ol  diro^ 
aToXoc  iircaToXrjv  jpd(f)ovaL  tS  fcpiTjj.  11.  6  ^6^0^ 
TOV  KpvdTaXXov  TpeTrei  fie  (me)  diro  tov  tottov,  12.  ol 
Oeol  exovcrc  Trjv  (fxovrjv  fcal  ttjp  piop(f>rjv  dvOpcoTTOOP 
(anthropo-morpMc).  18.  ol  diroaToXoc  dyyeXXovac 
Tovf;  tS)v  dSeX(f>(OP  X6yov(;, 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  horses  in  the  park  are  learning  the  art 
of  war.  2.  The  messengers  announce  war.  3.  He 
turns  the  horse  in  a  circle  around  the  park  beyond 
the  museum.  4.  The  water  in  the  pipes  is  from 
the  river.  5.  The  horses  perceive  the  fear  of  the 
master.  6.  We  are  reading,  an  account  of  the  arts 
(techn-o-logy).  7.  Fear  in  war  does  not  adorn  the 
citizens.  8.  You  do  not  see  the  forms  of  the  gods. 
9.  Have  you  letters  from  the  brothers  of  the  am- 
bassador? 10.  The  arts  adorn  the  life  of  men. 
11.  The  letter  reports  the  ambassador's  words 
about  war.  12.  The  heat  of  the  sun  sends-away 
ice  from  the  rivers.  13.  Do  you  see  instruments 
of  war  in  the  museums?  14.  The  brothers  per- 
ceive the  skill  of  the  citizens  in  war.  15.  The  am- 
bassador's friend  is  in  the  messenger's  place. 

60.  Notes  on  Derivatives, 

1.  As  was  said  before   (36,   2),  the  adverb  ev 
often  has  in  composition  the  meaning  good.     From 


46 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[60- 


€v  and  dyye\o<;  was  formed  the  noun  eu-ayyeXiov 
good  tidings^  which  is  also  the  meaning  of  our 
Saxon  word  gospel.  In  Latin  this  became  evan- 
gelium^  the  sound  of  the  combination  of  Greek 
letters  eua-  being  best  represented  to  the  Roman 
ear  by  eva-^  pronounced  in  the  Roman  way.  Evan- 
gelium  gave  us  evangel,  evangelical,  evangelize,  etc., 
pronounced  in  our  English  way,  which  causes  the 
first  syllable  to  sound  very  different  from  the  Greek 


ev. 


2.  Philadelphia  is  usually  translated  Irotherly 
love  ;  the  verb  (fytXeo)^  from  ^/Xo9,  is  the  common 
word  signifying  to  love. 

3.  a.  Theology  is  the  science  which  treats  of  the 
nature  of  God,  and  his  relation  to  his  works.  The- 
ist  and  theism  are  formed  from  ^eo9,  as  deist  and 
deism  from  Latin  deus. 

b.  A-theist  has  for  its  first  element  the  syllable  a- 
(which  takes  the  form  av-  before  a  vowel),  called 
alpha  privative  (Latin  privo^  to  take  awaif).  This 
syllable  has  the  force  of  not  which  in-  and  un-  have 
in  such  words  as  in-active  and  un-known ;  in  fact 
av-  is  the  original  form,  related  to  our  negative  in- 
(from  Latin)  and  un-^  and  might  more  fitly  be 
called  negative  av-.  Accordingly  a-theist  means  not- 
theist  So  from  fMop(f>f]  we  have  a-morphous,  literally 
shape-less;  from  vBcop,  an-hydrous  av-vZpo^  water-less; 
and  from  gnostic  (see  51,  2),  a-gnostic.  Care  is 
sometimes  necessary  in  order  to  distinguish  this 
an-  followed  by  -a-  from  the  preposition  ana-  (see 
51,  5,  I). 


60] 


ADDITIONAL  A-   AND  O- STEMS. 


47 


c.  Apo-theosis  is  formed  directly  from  airo-Oeow 
deify^  which  goes  back  to  airo  and  6e6^.  Theo-dore 
(©€0-Sft)y909  gift  of  God}  has  for  its  second  part 
Bcopov,  -ov,  gift.  Poly-theism  (see  91, 12)  is  a  belief 
in  many  gods. 

4.  Hippo-drome,  from  rTTTro?  and  Bpofio^^  literally 
horse-race^  is  mostly  used  of  a  place  for  a  horse- 
race. 

5.  In  bi-cycle,  the  syllable  bi-  is  a  Latin  prefix 
meaning  double.     (For  tricycle  see  82,  8.) 

6.  Morpheus  (from  fjLop(f>r]}  was  the  god  of  dreams 
(literally  the  shaper  or  fashioner}  and  hence  the 
god  of  sleep.  From  Morpheus  in  this  latter  sense 
we  have  morphine.  In  meta-morphosis  (from  fiera- 
fiop(f>6(o  trans-form}  the  preposition  yttera,  as  is  often 
the  case,  denotes  a  change.  So  also  in  met-em- 
psychosis  (^fieT-efi-yjriJx^oco  from  fjuerd,  ev,  and  ^jrv^rj), 
the  doctrine  that  the  soul,  after  the  death  of  the 
body  which  it  inhabits,  is  reborn  into  another. 
Anthropo-morph-ism  (^avOpwiros:}  is  the  representa- 
tion of  God  in  the  form  or  with  the  character  of 
man. 

7.  Apo-stle  is  another  instance  of  a  word  which 
has  lost  the  o-  of  the  Greek  original,  while  its  ad- 
jective apo-stolic  has  retained  the  vowel.  (Com- 
pare parable  and  parabolic,  devil  and  diabolic,  46,  3.) 
Epistle  and  epi-stol-ary  are  another  similar  pair. 
(With  the  variation  of  e  to  o  in  the  derivatives  of 
are  Way  compare  the  variation  of  a  to  o  in  the  de- 
rivatives of  ySaXXft),  46,  3.     See  also  57,  7.) 

8.  Tep^i/77  gives  us  technical,  pertaining  to  an  art 


48 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[61- 


or  trade;  technique  (through  the  French),  the 
technical  or  material  part  of  an  art,  as  distinguished 
from  the  intellectual  and  imaginative  part,  as  in 
music  or  painting ;  techn-o-logy,  a  description  of  the 
arts;  also  poly-technic  (see  91,  12). 

9.  '^TScop  generally  appears  in  English  as  hydr-. 
Examples  are  hydra  (a  portentous  water-serpent  on 
which  grew  two  new  heads  for  every  one  cut  off), 
hydr-ant,  hydr-o-meter  (yLterpoz/),  hydr-o-graphy,  hydr- 
o-phobia (0o/3o9). 

X.  Adjectives  of  the  Vowel  Declension. 

61.  These  adjectives  follow  the  second  declen- 
sion in  the  masculine  and  neuter,  and  the  first  de- 
clension in  the  feminine.  Thus  the  nominative 
singular  ends  in  -09,  -a  (or  -77),  -ov  (Latin  -us^  -a, 
-urn). 


wise. 

Sing.  N. 

o'0(f)6(; 

ao(f)T] 

O'0(f>6v 

G. 

ao(f)OV 

ao(l>r]^ 

ao<f>ov 

D. 

(Tocfxa 

ao(f)7J 

aocf)^ 

A. 

ao(\>6v 

ao(f)j]v 

ao(l>6v 

V. 

ao^€ 

(ro(f>7] 

o-Qcfyov 

Dual  N.  A.  V. 

ao(f)co 

(ro(f>a 

ao<f>co 

G.D. 

ao(j>ocv 

ao^alv 

ao(j>olv 

Plu.    N.  V. 

G'0(f>OL 

o'0(f>aL 

(ro(f)d 

G. 

0'0(f>(OV 

ao<f>S)v 

O-0(f)(0V 

D. 

(TO^ol^; 

ao(f>aL<; 

cro(f>oi<; 

A. 

G'0<f>OV^ 

ao(f>a<; 

(Tocfxi 

G4]   ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  49 


other. 


Sing.  N. 

eT€/309 

irepd 

erepov 

G. 

€T€pOV 

€T€pa<; 

erepov 

D. 

€T€p(p 

erepa 

erepa) 

A. 

erepov 

erepav 

erepov 

V. 

erepe 

erepa 

erepov 

Dual  N.  A.  V. 

iripco 

erepd 

erepco 

G.D. 

erepoLv 

erepaiv 

erepoiv 

Plu.    N.V. 

erepoL 

erepai 

erepa 

G. 

erepayv 

erepcov 

erepcov 

D. 

erepoL^ 

erepai^ 

erepoL^ 

A. 

erepov^ 

erepa<^ 

erepa 

62.  The  feminine  singular  always  has  a  long 
vowel  throughout ;  long  -a  is  retained  after  e,  ^,  or 
p;  otherwise  it  is  changed  to  -77,  as  in  the  first 
class  of  feminine  nouns.     (See  24,  a.) 

a.  In  the  nominative  and  genitive  plural  the  feminine  fol- 
lows the  accent  of  the  masculine. 

63.  Bule.  As  in  Latin,  the  adjective  must  agree 
with  its  noun  in  gender^  number^  and  case. 

64.  The  relative  pronoun^  09,  ^,  o  who^  is  declined 
as  follows. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


09 

ov 
ov 


Sing. 

V 
779 

r}V 


rf 

o 
ov 

♦ 
(O 

t 

0 


r/ 
OV 

&v 


Plu. 

r/ 

at 

(OV 


oh     aU 


Of9 


^9 


a 

(OV 

oU 
a 


Dual  N.  A. 
G.D. 


(O 


)lv 


1f>*»W"0* 


60 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[65— 


65.  Bule.  The  relative  pronoun  agrees  with 
its  antecedent  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  but 
takes  the  case  required  by  the  construction  of  its 

own  clause. 

66.   Vocabulary. 

dyaOo^,  -7],  '6v  good  (Agatha). 

avTi,  prep.  w.  gen.,       instead  of. 

star  (astr-al). 

-self;  myself  himself,  itself, 
etc.  (auto-biography);  pre- 
ceded by  the  article,  same. 

book  (Bible). 

think. 

7)  So|a, -779  (fr.  So/ceft)),  opinion  (ortho-dox). 
eV/,  prep.  w.  dat.,         upon  (compare  58  eVt)- 

other  (hetero-dox). 

bad  (caco-phony). 

stone  (litho-graph). 

alone,  only,  only  one  (mono- 
gram). 

deal  out,  distribute  (Nemesis). 

6  vofio^y^  'ov  (iT.v€fi(i)),  law  (metro-nome). 

i(l)  straight,  (2)  upright, 
(3)  right  (as  opposed  to 
wrong^  (ortho-dox). 


TO  darpov,  -ov 


y       t  /         '  1 

avTO^y  -rj,  '0 


TO  ^CK^iov,  -ov 
SoKeo) 


eTe/309,  -a,  -ov 
KaKO^,  'rjy  'OV 
6  XiOo^y  'OV 

/jl6vo<;,  -t],  'OV 

V6/JLC0 


*     / 


1  The  neuter  nominative  and  accusative  singular  of  airros  is 
avrd;  otherwise  the  word  is  declined  like  o-o<^os,  but  has  no 
vocative  form. 

2  No/xos  means,  flrst,  what  is  dealt  out  to  one,  and  so  what  is 
held  in  use  and  possession ;  hence  the  meanings  custom,  usage, 
and  finally  law.    For  change  of  c  to  0  compare  60,  7. 


67]  ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  51 


09,  rjy  ^ 


ircoXeco 

6  ^L^io-irdiKrj^^y  'OV 

aocfyof;,  -rjy  -ov 
7)  o'0(f>id,  -a9 


who,  that,  ivhich. 

sell. 

book-seller,  biblio-pole, 

wise  (theo-soph). 

wisdom  (Sophia). 


67.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.  'O  /cptT^9  7/oa<^€6  a^aOov  fitfiXiov  irepl  tcov 
voficop.  2.  6  iroLvrv^  ^^^rcx;  ypd^et  (auto-graph) 
Tov  (his)  ^:ov  (auto-bio-graphy).  3.^  oi  iroXlTav 
o'i  Tou^  vofiov^  avTol  TToUovaLVy  avTovofMoi  (auto- 
nomous) €l(TL.      4.    ov  (TX0\d^0/JL€V  iirl  Xidcp  TOP  VOflOV 

rypd(\>eLV  (Utho-graph).  5.  6  cnT6(TTo\o^  e^et  eV^- 
aToXyv,^  dyytXk€L  t7)v  Bo^av  tmv  iroXlrSiv.  6.  iv 
yp6v(o  fiavedvovaiv  djaOd  ^t^Xia  dvaytyvcoaKeiv 
iiVTl  \aKCyv  ^t^Xicop.  7.  6  Xl0o^  pr^ypDat  {breaks} 
TOP  fcpvaTuXXop  eVl  roJ  TrorafMoi.  8.  to^  t&p  ao(f>&p^ 
So^a9  Trepl  tcop  aarpoyp  fiapOdpofiep  ck  ^l^Xlwp.^ 
9.  opdeTe  TOP  eTepop  aheX(f>op  tov  dyyeXov.  10.  oi 
ao(l>ol  fcal  ai  aoc^al  to  avTo  (the  same  thing}  Xeyovai 
(tauto-logy).    11.  Ti  BofC€€T€  avTol  irepl  Tov^cffXiov; 

12.  ©eo9  dyaOd  pepLSt  toI^  dyaOok  fcal  to2<;  fca/col^-^ 

13.  oi  opdol  p^opoi  €v  dpaycypcoo-Kovat  tov^  ip  tt} 
'>irvxfl  Popovs .  14.  ovfc  exop^ep  tov^  avTOV^  p6p.ov^ 
ot)^  €T€pot  exovac. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  Not  booksellers  alone  sell  (mono-poly)  books. 
2.   The    wise    and   good   man's   opinion   is   right 

1  The  adjective  may  be  used  alone  as  a  noun,  as  in  Latin. 


62 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[68— 


(ortho-dox).  3.  Bad  citizens  do  not  make  wise 
laws.  4.  I  see  a  friend  of  wisdom  (philo-soph-er) 
who  has  a  bad  horse  to  sell.  5.  [They]  are  ^  bad 
citizens  who  make  war  in  the  land.  6.  The  sun 
distributes  heat.  7.  The  bookseller's  only  brother 
is  throwing  stones.  8.  The  poets  tell  (Xeyovao')  a 
legend  about  the  two  (Suo)  ways  of  life.  9.  We 
are  ourselves  reading  a  book  about  the  laws  of 
the  stars  (astronomy).  10.  We  perceive  the  wis- 
dom of  God  in  the  stars.  11.  The  citizens  make 
laws,  which  they  write  on  stone.  12.  They  are 
reading  the  books  which  they  have.  13.  The  law 
alone  is  master  of  the  upright  citizen.  14.  Others 
have  the  same  law. 

68.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  As  a  preposition  avri  means  instead  of;  but 
its  original  force  was  rather  facing^  opposite  to^ 
opposed  to^  and  this  last  is  its  common  meaning  in 
composition,  both  in  Greek  and  in  English.  Thus 
an  anti-periodic  (Trepi-oSo?)  medicine  is  one  against 
a  periodical  disease  (as  quinine  for  fever  and 
ague).  The  word  avTL-(f>cova  {^cov/]},  an  adjective 
in  the  neuter  plural,  denoted  a  form  of  church 
music  in  which  one  choir  or  part  of  a  choir 
responds  to  another.  This  became  in  late  Latin 
antifona  (retaining  the  Greek  accent),  which 
being  taken  into  English  became  (through  the 
forms   antefne^  antSvne^  antSmne^  dntemn^  dntern) 

1  An  enclitic  (55)  should  not  begin  a  sentence. 


68]   ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  53 

anthem,  taking  on  a  slightly  extended  meaning. 
Finally  anti-phone  was  reintroduced  in  the  original 
sense.  The  Anti-nomians  (z/o/xo?)  denied^  it  was 
said,  that  they  were  bound  by  the  moral  law. 
Anti-nomy  is  an  opposition  or  contradiction  of  laws. 
In  fact  anti-  has  been  so  fully  naturalized  that  it 
is  now  used  freely  as  a  prefix,  whether  the  rest 
of  the  word  is  Greek  or  not. 

2.  So  far  as  derivation  goes,  we  should  expect 
astro-logy  to  have  the  meaning  which  is  really 
given  to  astro-nomy  (vofio^).  But  here,  as  often 
happens,  use  and  association  —  one  might  say,  the 
company  which  the  word  has  kept  —  have  given  a 
certain  twist  to  the  original  force  of  astro-logy,  so 
that  it  is  now  the  name  for  a  false,  astro-nomy 
for  a  true,  science  of  the  stars.  Another  form 
of  ao-Tpov  is  aa-Ttjp;  this  gives  us  aster,  and 
asterisk  (do-reptcr/cosO  is  a  diminutive  of  the  same 
word. 

3.  a.  A  people  that  has  the  right  of  using  or 
making  its  own  laws  is  called  anto-nomons,  and 
anto-nomy  is  the  right  itself.  Anto-maton  and  anto- 
matic  also  contain  avro^.  The  second  element  is 
from  a  Greek  root  fia-  to  desire,  or  will;  hence 
anto-maton  is  etymologically  acting  by  one^s  own 
will,  and  so  self-acting.  The  word  is  especially 
used  of  machines. 

b.  With  the  article  before  it  avro^;  signifies  the 
same;  to  auro,  often  run  together  into  ravro, 
signifies,  therefore,  the  same  thing.  Hence  ravro- 
Xoyid  tanto-logy. 


54 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[68— 


4.  A  biblio-graphy  is  a  description  or  list  of  the 
books  on  a  particular  subject.  Other  compounds 
of  I3lI3\Iov  are  biblio-mania  {fiavLa  madness},  and 

biblio-phile  (^1X09). 

6.  Hetero-dox  is  usually  contrasted  with  ortho- 
dox. In  para-dox  the  first  element  is  Trapd;  but 
the  preposition  here  means,  not  beside,  but  against, 
contrary  to.  Ao^a  also  signifies  the  good  opinion 
which  others  have  of  one,  and  so  fame,  glory. 
This  is  the  force  of  dox-  in  dox-o-logy. 

6.  Epi-graphy  is  the  branch  of  philology  (see  51, 
6)  which  deals  with  inscriptions  cut  on  stone,  of 
which  there  are  thousands  in  Greek  and  Latin 
alone.  Epi-gram  (iTrt-ypafM/jLa}  meant  originally 
such  an  inscription;  but  as  these  were  usually 
short  and  often  in  verse,  the  word  came  to  be 
used  for  a  short,  pithy  poem,  or  saying.  The  epi- 
glottis (see  41,  1)  is  just  over  the  glottis.  In  all 
these  epi-  has  the  meaning  given  in  the  vocabu- 
lary (66);  in  ep-ode  (cJS^y)  and  epi-logue  (con- 
trasted with  prologue;  see  51,  6,  a)  it  indicates 
something  added  on  at  the  end.  Further,  rjfiepa  is 
the  Greek  word  for  day  ;  before  the  rough  breath- 
ing eiri  loses  the  final  vowel  and  becomes  e<^'; 
thus  is  formed  i(f>vfJi€pL<;  diary  or  day-book,  whence 
eph-emeris.  'E^/;/xepo9  eph-emeral  is  the  adjective, 
signifying  lasting  for  a  day. 

7.  Ka/to9  appears  in  caco-pliony,  the  opposite  of 
en-phony  (see  35,  I.,  6) ;  in  caco-doxy,  the  opposite 
of  orthodoxy  (see  68,  5);  and  in  caco-graphy,  the 
opposite  of  ortho-graphy  (see  68,  11). 


68]  AI)JECTIVi:S  OF  THE  VOWEL  DECLENSION.  55 

8.  LithoLogy  is  another  of  the  ''ologies^^  —  the 
science  which  treats  of  stones  or  rocks. 

9.  Moi/09  is  represented  by  mono-,  with  the  force 
of  one,  or  single,  in  a  great  many  English  words. 
Common  examples  are  mono-gram;   mono-graph,  a 
treatise  on  a  single  subject,  usually  of  a  limited 
nature ;  mon-ody,  a  mournful  poem  (cJS?;)  express- 
ing one  person's  grief;   mono-theism  (^€09),  belief 
in  one  God ;   mono-logue,  a  speech  uttered  by  one 
person,  contrasted  with  dialogue  (see  105,  2),  and 
not  quite  the  same  as  soli-loquy  (from  Latin  solus 
and  loquor) ;    mono-lith   (\i0o<;},  a   large    column 
or  statue  of  a  single  block  of  stone  ;    mono-mania 
(^fjLavid  68,  4)  madness  on  one  subject  only  ;  mono- 
tone (0  t6vo<^  tone,  from  retVo)  strain} ;  mono-metallist 
(^t6  fieraWov  originally  a  mine,  then  metal)  one 
who  holds  that  one  metal  only,  gold,  should  be  used 
as  the  standard  of  value,  whereas  a  6i-metallist 
(compare  i/-cycle  60,  6)  believes  that  both  gold  and 
silver  should  be  used  as  a  double  standard ;  mono- 
syllable (see  110,  8) ;  mono-phthong,  a  single  vowel 
sound  (0  (f>d6yyo<;  sound)  contrasted  with  di-phthong 
(for  di-  see  96,  1).     Monad  is  also  from  fiovo^;,  a 
derivative  of  the  same  sort  with  decad  (see  B€fcd<;, 
80).     Further,  from  yLtoVo9  were  derived  fMovd^co  to 
live  alone  and  fiova^o^;  single,  solitary.     The  latter 
has  been   corrupted   to   monk;    from  fjLovd^co  we 
have  mon-astery   (^pLopaarijpiov,  -ou)   and   monastic 
(fiovaaTLKo^;}.    The  early  monks  lived  alone,  hence 
the  name.      Monachism  has  retained  the  -a;^-  of 
fjLopa^6<;* 


56 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[69— 


10.  Metro-nome  might  be  rendered  law-giver  of 
the  measure  (^/jLerpov  and  vofio^) ;  it  is  the  name 
of  an  instrument  for  keeping  the  time  in  music. 
From  the  same  verb  v^fxco  are  derived  v6fio<;  law 
(see  66  and  foot-note  to  v6fic<;}  and  vofi6<;  pasture 
(one  meaning  of  vefX(o  is  graze  or  pasture^ ;  vofid- 
8e9  was  a  term  applied  to  tribes  who  moved  from 
pasture  to  pasture  feeding  their  herds.  Hence 
our  word  nomad.  N€>so-69  (originally  distribution') 
denoted  indignation  at  undue  or  too  great  good 
fortune ;  this  indignation  on  the  part  of  the  gods 
was  personified  as  a  goddess,  who  repaired  such 
inequality  by  humbling  those  who  were  too  proud 
in  prosperity,  especially  when  such  haughtiness 
led  to  impiety  or  crime ;  hence  our  word  nemesis, 
retribution,  divine  vengeance. 

11.  Ortho-graphy  is  right  writing;  ortho-epy  is 
right  pronunciation  (to  eiro<;  a  word). 

12.  A  theo-sopMst  <iee6<^  and  ao^6<i)  is  one  who 
believes  that  superhuman  knowledge  may  be  at- 
tained by  direct  intercourse  with  God  and  superior 
spirits ;  theo-soph  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same 
sense,  and  theo-sophy  is  the  belief  or  doctrine  of 
theosophists.     (For  sophist,  etc.,  see  74,  10.) 

XI.  n-VEKBs:  Present  Indicative  and 
Infinitive  Middle  and  Passive. 

69.  The  passive  voice  represents  the  subject  as 
acted  upon,  while  the  active  voice  represents  the 
subject  as  acting.    There  is  also  in  Greek  a  middle 


71]  Sl'VEBBS:  MIDDLE  AND  PASSIVE.  57 

voice  which  represents  the  subject  as  acting  either 
upon,  or  with  reference  to,  itself.  But  in  the  pres- 
ent tense  the  passive  and  middle  have  the  same 
endings,  and  often  are  to  be  distinguished  only  by 
the  connection  in  which  the  words  are  found.  In 
this  book,  only  the  one  word  (\>a[v(o  show  will  be 
used  in  the  middle  voice ;  all  other  forms  with 
these  endings  may  be  understood  as  passive,  or 
else  as  deponent  (see  71). 


70.    Pres.  Ind. 

S.     1  (f)aivo-fJLai 

2  (f>aiveL 

3  (})aiv€'raL 


Middle. 


I  show  myself  appear 
you  show  yourself 
he  shoivs  himself 


Du.  2  (paive-aOov  you  two  shotv  yourselves 

3  (fyalve-adov  they  ttvo  shotv  themselves 

PI.  1  (fyatvo-fieda  we  show  ourselves 

2  (f)atve-(T0€  you  show  yourselves 

3  (f)aLV0'PTaL  they  show  themselves 

Pres.  Inf. 

^aive-aOaL  to  show  one's  self 


Passive. 

am  shown 
are  shown 
is  shown 

are  shown 
are  shown 

are  shown 
are  shown 
are  shown 


to  be  shown 


71.  Deponent  verbs,  as  in  Latin,  are  such  as 
have  the  passive  (middle)  form,  but  are  active  ill 
meaning,  as  aKiirrofjiat  view.  The  inflection  is 
exactly  like  that  of  (f>aLvo/JLaL^  but  the  translation 
is  of  course  active. 


58 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[^2- 


72.    Vocabulary. 

lead. 
6  ay(oy6(;y  -ov  (fr.  dyoi),  leader^  guide  (dem-agogue). 


ayco 


the  people^  the  free  citizens^ 

the  commons  (dem-agogue). 

true^   real^    genuine   (etjrmo- 

logy). 
equal  (iso-ttiermal). 
long.,  large  (macron). 
small.,  little  (micro-scope), 
house  (oeco-nomy). 
inhabit,  dwell  in. 
7rp€cr^vT€po<;y  -a,  -ov'^     older.,  elder  (presbyter). 

examine^  view  (skeptic). 

watcher.,  ZooA:o^^^  (micro-scope). 


o  Sr]fjLO<;^  -ov 

€TVfjLO(;,  -?;,  -ov 

Lao<;^  -77,  -op^ 
fiufcpcf;,  -a,  -ov 
fMKpG<^,  -a,  -ov 
6  oIko<;,  -ov 
ol/ceco 


(TfceTTTOfiat,  dep., 
o   (T/coTTo^,  -ov  (fr. 

afC€7rT0/jLat) 
o  e7r/-<7/co7ro9,  -ov 
o'0(f>L^ofjLat  (fr. 

ao(f>6s!^,  dep., 
uTTo,  prep.  w.  dat., 
(f>aLV(o 

^aivo/jiat 


overseer^  guardian(e]fi&co'p-3l). 
be  clever^  or  wise  (sophist). 

under. 

show  (dia-phan-ous). 
show  one's  self  appear 
(phenomenon) . 


73.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.  'O  Tov  StjfjLov  dy(oyo<;  (dem-agogue)  ov  opdofiev 

1  Followed  by  the  dative. 

2  The  ending  -repos,  -a,  -ov  is  equivalent  to  the  English  -er, 
denoting  the  comparative  degree. 


1Z]         Cl- VERBS:  MIDDLE  AND  PASSIVE.  59 

ovK  dyaOo^  ttoXitt;?  iari.  2.  ol  iroXlrai  dyovrai 
iirl  irdke/jLov.  3.  /jLlKpo<;  \i6o<;  fidWerai  eVl  fiaKpov 
(to  a  long  distance^.  4.  97  yrj  virep  tov  jSopedv 
(see  46,  6)  ovk  oifcieraL.  5.  Oeo?  ecmv  eirlaKoiro^ 
tov  paKpov  Kctrpov  (macro-cosm)^  Ka\  tov  p^lfcpov 
Koapov  (micro-cosm).  6.  oi  iiriaKOTroL  cr/ceTTToirrat, 
Ta9  oBov^.  7.  0  irpea^vTepo^  dSe\(f)o<;  <TO(f)L^€Tat 
fcal  €)(€L  ^i/SXla  iv  tS  ocfco).  8.  o  cTvp^o^  7roLi]Tr)<; 
Xiyet  €Tvpov(;  X6yov(;.  9.  ol  dyyeXot  <f>aivovaL  roS 
hrjp(p  TTjv  TOV  KpiTOv  eirKTToXrjV.  10.  77  0LK€0p.€Vrf 
(inhabited^  yrj  p,a/cpd  icTt.  11.  tl  virb  tm  XlOcp 
icTTL  ;  12.  TO  Oeppov  tmv  daTpcov  ovk  Xcrov  €(ttI  to) 
OeppM  (iso-thermal)  tov  rfxlov.  13.  Trpea^vTepov 
aoeXcpov  €^o),  09  ayauov  toitov  e'x^et  €V  tq)  ueaTpcp. 
14.  €)(eL  0  hrjp.0^  6p0ov^  dycoyov<;  ;  16.  taot  elcrlv  ol 
dvdpcoTTOt ; 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  star  itself  is  not  small.  2.  To  learn-to- 
know  the  true  opinions  of  the  people  is  the  work 
of  a  wise  man.  3.  The  seasons  are  equal.  4.  The 
skill  of  the  overseer  himself  is  not  equal  to  the 
skill  of  the  little  bookseller.  5.  He  is  examining 
the  little  stones  which  are  in  the  road.  6.  True 
overseers  show  themselves  wise.^  7.  There  is 
water  under  the  house.  8.  The  laws  of  the  people 
are  (being)  written  in  books.     9.  I  am  writing  a 

1  In  contrast  with  the  mind  of  man,  the  micro-cosm  or  little 
world,  the  larger  universe  was  called  macro-cosm. 

2  A  predicate  adjective  belonging  to  the  subject  must  agree 
with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


60 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[74— 


long  letter.  10.  An  upright  leader  of  the  people 
speaks  true  words.  11.  In  the  long  time  of  ice 
we  do  not  see  roses.  12.  They  examine  the  little 
circles  which  you  are  making  on  the  ice.  13.  The 
leader  of  the  people  is-clever,  but  (aXXa)  does  not 
show  himself  wise. 

74.   Notes  on  DerivatAves. 

1.  An  epi-demic  disease  is  one  prevailing  among 
the  people  (eVt  rco  SrjfjLfp^.  Demotic,  belonging  to  the 
people^  is  often  contrasted  with  hieratic  (see  96,  6). 

2.  To  erv/jLOP  was  the  Greek  term  for  the  literal 
sense  of  a  word ;  hence  we  have  etymon,  the  primi- 
tive from  which  a  word  is  derived,  and  etymo-logy. 

3.  P\om  tcro9  XP^^^^  equal  time  we  have  iso- 
chronous, lasting  an  equal  time;  from  laoy  Oep^iov 
equal  heat^  iso-therm,  an  iso-thermal  line,  or  line 
passing  through  places  of  which  the  average  tem- 
perature is  equal;  and  from  'laov  jxerpov  equal  meas- 
ure, iso-metric.  Iso-sceles  has  for  its  second  element 
TO  a/ceXof;,  -€09  a  leg. 

4.  The  mark  of  length  over  a  vowel  is  a  macron. 
The  macro-meter  measures  objects  a  long  way  off. 
Macro-  occurs  in  other  scientific  terms,  like  macro- 
cephalous (^K€(f)a\ri^ . 

5.  Mlfcp6<;  is  seen  in  micro-scope  (crAroTro?),  micro- 
meter, micro-cephalous,  micro-nesia  (7  j/?}o"09  an 
island^. 

6.  Eco-nomy  (formerly  spelled  oeconomy ;  see  14,  g^ 
is  from  olfco-pofiLa,  which  goes  back  to  oIko<;  and 
v6/jLo<;y   although   the   changes   of    meaning  seem 


74]  n-VEBBS:  MIDDLE  AND  PASSIVE.  61 

strange  at  first  sight,  olfco^  is  not  only  house,  but 
also  the  estate  or  farm  which  belonged  to  the  house ; 
and  one  meaning  of  i/e/xw,  the  primitive  of  v6fio<; 
(see  66  and  note  2),  is  to  manage.  An  olfco-v6fio<; 
was  a  manager  of  a  house  or  an  estate  ;  hence  oUo- 
vo/Jild  came  to  signify,  not  only  management,  but 
also  good  management,  of  property.  This,  then,  is 
the  proper  meaning  of  economy. 

7.  In  oUeop^evr],  the  present  passive  (middle) 
participle  of  oUea),  the  vowels  eo  were  contracted 
to  ov\  V  oUovfjLevv.  with  yfj  understood,  was  a 
term  for  the  entire  inhabited  world.  Accordingly 
an  oecumenical  council  is  one  assembled  from  all 

lands. 

8.  Priest  is  corrupted  from  presbyter.  (An  in- 
termediate form  is  prester.) 

9.  Skeptic  or  sceptic  (aKeiTTLKos:^,  from  aKeirTOfiai, 
meant  originally  one  who  is  inclined  to  examine 
into  statements,  not  accepting  them  without  such 
examination.  The  root  also  takes  the  form  aKoir- 
in  (TKoiro^y  which  means  not  only  watcher,  but  also 
the  thing  watched,  namely,  the  mark  aimed  at. 
Hence  the  original  meaning  of  scope  is  aim,  or  pur- 
pose. From  this  are  derived  the  other  uses  of  the 
word.  Among  compounds  of  aKoir6<^  in  the  sense 
of  watcher,  along  with  micro-scope  (see  74,  5)  we 
have  tele-scope  (r^Xe)  and  hor-o-scope,  a  view  or  de- 
scription of  the  position  of  the  planets  at  the  hour 
(i&pa;  see  31,  8)  of  one's  birth;  for  astrologers 
held  that  one's  whole  life  could  be  foretold  from 
such  a  horoscope.     The  syllable  is  even  put  with 


62 


TUB  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[74— 


some  words  not  from  Greek,  as  in  spectro-^GO^Q, 
from  Latin  spectrum.  'ETTL-o-fcoiro^  gave  the  Latin 
epheopus  and  our  epi-scopal,  epi-scopacy ;  bishop  is  a 
corrupted  form  of  €7rL'(r/co7ro<;  (in  old  English  bis- 
cop^  bisceop^, 

10.  From  (TO(f)L^ofjLat  is  derived  ao(f>io-ry(;  sophist. 
The  sophists  were  teachers  of  eloquence,  philoso- 
phy, and  politics;  and  as  many  of  them  were 
skilled  in  a  wordy  and  showy,  but  false,  mode  of 
argument,  the  entire  class  got  a  bad  name.  Hence 
the  implication  of  dishonesty,  or  of  an  endeavor  to 
deceive,  in  our  words  sophistry,  sophism,  sophistical. 
To  sophisticate  is  primarily  to  give  one  the  quali- 
ties of  a  sophist ;  from  this  follow  sophisticated  and 
nnsophisticated. 

11.  The  root  of  (f)aLV(o  is  (f>av-,  or  (f>a-.     Phase 
C(f>d(Tc<;^^  phantasm  ((fyavraa/xa),  phantasy  or  fantasy 
((f>avTao-la),  fantastic  (originally  phantastic),  phan- 
tom, epiphany  (eTn-^dveLo)  —  all  these  have  mean- 
ings closely  connected  with  that  of   appearance. 
Fancy  is  a  shortened  form  of  fantasy.     Em-phasis 
(^€fi(f>a(Tt^,  iv  and  (f)aLV(o')^  starting  from  nearly  the 
same  sense  of  an  appearing,  took  on  the  meanings 
declaration,  significance,  and  finally  special  signifi- 
cance or  force  in  an  expression.     Emphatic  is  the 
adjective.     Diaphanous  (Sta-cfyavt]^)  signifies  letting 
things  shotv  through.      Finally,  (f>aiv6fjL€vo<;,  -tj,  -op 
appearing  is  the  present  middle  participle,  declined 
like  aya06<;.     The  neuter  (j>a'v6fi€vov  phaenomenon, 
or  phenomenon,  signifies,  therefore,  that  which  ap- 
pears. 


, 


1 
) 


75J 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


63 


XII.    Consonant    Declension:    Stems  in  -k- 

AND  -7-. 

75.  To  the  Third  or  Consonant  Declension  be- 
long nouns  whose  stems  end  in  (1)  a  consonant 
or  (2)  in  l  or  v.  Masculines  and  feminines  are 
declined  alike. 


Tj  (^/cXlfiaK-^ 
ladder 

K\lfia^ 
KKifiaK'0<i 

KktXaK'L 

/cXt/JLaK-a 
KXtfia^ 

Dual  N.  A.V.  KKt^aK-e 

G.  D.  KKlfXaK-OLV 


Sing.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Plu. 


N.V. 
G. 
D. 
A- 


KXtfjLaK'e^ 
KXlfidfC'COV 
KXtfjia^L 
KKtjxaK-a^ 


77  (aapiC'^ 
flesh 

adp^ 

o'apK'0<i 

orapK-L 

adpK-a 

crdp^ 

adpK-e 
(rapfC'olv 

crdpK-e^ 
aapK'oyv 
aap^i 
adpK-a^ 


0 


(Xapvyy-^ 
throat 

Xdpvy^ 

Xapvyy-o^ 

XdpvyjH 

Xdpvyj-a 

Xdpvy^ 

Xdpvyy-€ 
Xapvyy-ocv 

Xdp  vyy'€<; 
Xapvyycov 
Xdpvy^c 
Xdpvyy-a^ 


a.  The  ending  of  the  nominative  singular  is  -9, 
which  unites  with  a  preceding  k  or  7  (or  ;)^)  to 
form  -^.  The  ending  of  the  dative  plural  is  -<r/, 
and  the  same  combination  takes  place. 

6.  Monosyllabic  stems  of  the  consonant  declension  accent 
the  case-ending  in  the  genitive  and  dative  of  all  numbers : 
the  long  syllables  -oiv  and  -a)v  take  the  circumflex. 


64 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[76- 


77] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


65 


alaOdvojjLaty  dep., 

o  dptdfjio^,  -ov 

dpL0/JLeco 

yv/jLv6<;,  -rjy  -ov 

yv/JLvd^o) 

TO  yvfJLvdatov,  -ov 

6  Xdpvy^y  -7709 

0   fJilfJiO^,  'OV 

fjLlfjbiofjLat,  dep., 
oy^oixai}  dep., 
irpSiTo^y  -77,  -ov 
7)  adp^y  'K6<i 
G'Tepeo^^  -a,  -ov 
avvy  prep.  w.  dat.. 


TfTTTft) 

6  Tviro^y  -ov 
v7ro-/€pfvofJLai,  dep., 

O   V7rO-f€piT7](;y  'OV 

(jyayelvy  infinitive, 
6  %/>i5c709,  -ou 


76.  Vocabulary, 

perceive  (aesth-etic). 

number, 

count  (arithmetic). 

naked^  bare, 

exercise. 

gymnasium  Qplace  for  exercise^. 

ladder  (climax). 

throaty  larynx. 

imitator  (mime). 

imitate, 

shall  see  (syn-op-sis). 

first  (proto-type). 

flesh  (sarc-ophagus). 

firm^  solid  (stereo-type). 

with  (syn-opsis). 

strike. 
i  type  (originally,  what  is  caused 
\      by  a  blow^. 

S(l)  answer^   (2)  play  a  part  on 
the  stage, 
actor  (hypo-crite,  hypo-crisy). 
to  eat  (sarco-phag-us). 
gold  (chrys-alis). 


77.  JExercises, 
I.  Translate  into  English. 
1.  'Ez;   T(p   yvyivaaltd    oylreaOe    /jLaKpa<;    /cXf/Juafca^, 

^  Future  of  opaw,  but  from  a  different  root,  ott-,  and  the 
future  suffix  -ao-  or  -ae- ;  inflected  like  the  present  middle 
(passive),  oil/ofxat,  oif/cL,  oxperaiy  etc. 


I 


2.  dv0p(O7rot  elaiv  ot  fiavddvovcrc  rrjv  adpKa  dv~ 
0pco7rcov  (f)ay€cv  (anthropo-phagous,  anthropo-phagi). 
o.  DC  XlOoc  vtto  Tft)  OLKW  aT€peoi  elai.  4.  ovk  ai- 
auaveaOe  rrjv  arepeav  adpfca  rcov  dvdpcoTroov  ot  ev 
T069  yvfivaaioif;  yv/jLvd^ovrat ;  5.  rcS  opydvrp  top 
Tov  vTTOfcpLTov  Xdpvyya  aKeirreraL  (laryng-o-scope). 

6.  0  (TKoiTO^  aladdverat  to  irpcoTov  daTpov.  7.  dya- 
6ov<;  VTTOKptTas;  ev  tQ>  OeaTpa)  oy^rofieOa^  oc  tou9  tov 
8j]fjL0v  dycoyov^  ev  ^IfMeovTai.  8.  6  ^pvab^  ovk  dya- 
6o(;  eaTL  (f)ay€lv.  9.  ov/c  oyjret  Ta  daTpa  avv  rcS 
7J\i(p.      10.  TviTTetv  eTepov^  kukov  eaTi.     11.  0  dpiO- 

flO^  TCOV  TTOXCTCOV   taO^    eaTL   TO)   dpiOpbtp  tS)V  d(TTpO)V. 

12.  oi  eirtaKOTroL  dpiBfieovai  tov  ev  Trj  oSco  Stj/jlov. 

13.  oy^ojjLeOa  tov  fUKpov  oIkov  ov  6  viTOKpLTr)^  olfceec  ; 

14.  oLfceei  ev  to)  TrpdnTco  oIkm  virep  tov  Tpoirov  Tri<^ 

ooov. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  With  the  actor  is  an  elder  brother.  2.  The 
ladder  strikes  the  bookseller  on  the  head.  3.  They 
will  see  a  man  who  writes  letters  with  (dat.  of 
means)  types  (t3rpo-graphy).  ^  4.  Wise  actors  show 
art.  5.  The  throats  of  the  horses  are  long.  6.  The 
overseers  will   see   the   solid   types   (stereo-type). 

7.  We  perceive  solid  gold  in  the  stone.  8.  We 
see  men  who  do  not  have  flesh  to  eat.  9.  Actors 
exercise  their  tongues  (in  Greek  the  tongues^  and 
throats.  10.  To  exercise  the  muscles  (plural  of 
o-dp^^  well  is  the  way  of  health.  11.  We  shall 
see  the  messenger  on  a  bare  horse.  12.  With  the 
messengers  are  guides.  13.  The  first  actor  is  a 
good  imitator  of  others'  voices.     14.  To  count  the 


c 


66 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[78— 


little  stones  in  the  river  requires  (in  Greek  is  of^ 
a  long  time. 

78.  Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  From  av-  privative  (see  60,  3,  5)  and  the  root 
of  aiaOdvofiac  we  have  an-aesthetic,  making  in-sen- 
sible^ and  an-aesthesia,  the  condition  of  insensibility 
produced  by  an  anaesthetic.  The  word  aesthetic  (al- 
(t07jtlk6^)^  which  originally  meant  merely  capable  of 
perceiving^  has  been  narrowed  down  to  the  meaning 
capable  of  perceiving  beauty^  or  pertaining  to  beauty; 
hence  aesthetics,  the  science  of  beauty  or  taste. 

2.  The  connection  between  the  meanings  of 
yv/jLvc<;  and  yv/juvd^co  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
Greek  boys  and  men  trained,  in  the  gymnastic 
schools,  quite  naked.  Of  course  gjrninic,  gfjminast, 
gymnastic  are  all  from  the  same  primitive. 

3.  K\lfiaKTr]p  is  the  round  of  a  ladder;  hence 
climateric,  one  of  the  successive  stages  of  develop- 
ment, and  hence  a  critical  time  of  life. 

4.  Mimic  and  mimetic  (^fjLl/jLrjrtKo^;}^  as  well  as 
mime,  are  from  fUfio<;y^  filijueofiai.  Panto-mime  has 
for  its  first  element  ira^  (see  110,  11). 

5.  The  root  of  oyjrofjiac  is  ott-,  which  appears  in 
optic,  optics.  Aut-opsy  (^avro^;^  is  self-seeing^  seeing 
for  07ie^s  self. 

6.  The  sarc-o-phagus  was  so  named  because  it 
was  originally  made  of  a  kind  of  limestone  which 
quickly  consumed  the  flesh  of  a  corpse ;  then  the 
name  was  given  to  any  stone  coffin.  From  adp^ 
was  also  derived  the  verb  aapKu^co  to  tear  the  flesh, 
as  dogs  do.  From  this  we  have  sarcasm  (a-apKaajjLo^;'). 


«p 


78] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


67 


7.  The  stereo-type  plate  is  a  solid  piece  of  metal, 
as  distinguished  from  the  separate  types.  The 
stere-opticon  (o-re/jeo?,  ott-)  throws  on  the  screen  an 
image  which  appears  solid  ;  the  stereo-scope,  by  the 
arrangement  of  its  lenses,  causes  the  picture  to 
look  like  a  solid  object. 

8.  Sui/  in  English  derivatives  takes  the  forms 
sjm-,  sym-,  syl-,  or  sy-,  according  to  the  nature  of 
the  following  letter,  and  has  the  general  meaning 
of  together.  Thus,  we  have  S3m-opsis  (ott-),  a  col- 
lective  view  (adjective  syn-optic)  ;  syn-od  (0S09)  a 
meeting ;  syn-agogue  (avv-aycoy)]  ;  dyco),  place  of 
religious  assembly  among  the  Jews ;  syn-chronous, 
agreeing  in  time  (%/)oi/o9)  ;  syn-chronism ;  sym-metry, 
cori^espondenee  in  measure  (^iierpov) ;  symphony 
(^^(ovrj)^  a  form  of  orchestral  music;  syl-logism 
(X0709  in  the  sense  of  reason;  see  51,  5,  a,  end),  a 
form  of  reasoning.  Systole  (^av-aroXr] ;  avv  and 
aT€W(o)  is  a  sending  together,  that  is,  contraction. 
It  is  contrasted  with  dia-stole  (^Sta-o-roXij},  in  which 
Sid  has  the  force  of  apart,  Latin  dis-;  thus  dia-stole 
is  the  relaxation  of  the  muscles  of  the  heart,  which 
alternates  with  the  sy-stole.  The  same  force  of 
Sid  is  seen  in  dia-critical,  distinguishing  (see  46,  1), 
and  dia-gnosis  (^ytypcoo-fcco'),  the  determination  of  a 
disease  by  noting  its  distinguishing  marks. 

9.  The  various  significations  of  type  can  all  be 
traced  back  to  that  of  something  produced  by  a  blow. 
For  instance,  the  image  or  other  device  on  a  coin 
was  made  by  a  blow  upon  the  die  under  which  the 
disk  of  metal  had  been  placed.     Thus  tutto?  and 


I 


68 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[79— 


type  get  the  meaning  of  stamp^  image^  and  next 
that  of  character  or  kind.  Among  compounds  and 
derivatives  are  typical,  proto-type  QirpcoTo^)^  phono- 
type  (a  printed  character  representing  a  sounds 
(fxovrj^^  auto-type  (avro^^^  helio-type  (fjXLos:^^  the  two 
latter  being  arbitrarily  used  to  denote  varieties  of 
permanent  photographs. 

10.  From  xp^^^(;  we  obtain  chrysalis  (from  its 
color),  chryso-lite  (X/^o?),  chrys-anthemum  {avOefiov^ 
-ov  flower ;  compare  avOo^^  98),  chrys-elephantine 
(^iX€(f>dpTtvo<;  from  6Xe<^a99  -avro^;  elephant,  and  then 
ivory).  In  some  of  the  finest  Greek  statues  the 
flesh  parts  were  of  ivory  and  the  rest  of  gold  ;  this 
kind  of  work  is  called  chrys-elephantine. 

11.  We  have  already  had  occasion  to  notice 
many  words  from  Greek  which  end  in  -ic,  repre- 
senting the  Greek  adjective  ending  -lko^  ;  as,  in 
this  section,  aesthetic,  optic,  typic,  etc.  This  sylla- 
ble -ic  is  so  common  and  familiar  that  it  is  added 
to  many  words  not  derived  from  Greek. 

XIIL   Consonant  Declension:  Stems  in 


-T-, 

-S-,  -0'. 

79. 

TO  (^(f)COT-) 

6  (ttoS-) 

0,  ^  (jopvW-) 

light 

foot 

bird 

Sing.  N. 

<^W9 

TTOU? 

opvls 

G. 

(})(OT-G<; 

7roS-09 

opvlO'O^ 

D. 

<f)COT'L 

TToS-L 

OpvW'L 

A. 

(f>(0^ 

TToS-a 

opvlv 

y. 

^W9 

TTOU^ 

opvJs 

i 


80] 


CONSONAJffT  DECLENSION. 


69 


Dual  N.A.V. 

<f>c!)T'6 

iro^e 

6pvl6'€ 

G.D. 

(fxOT'OLV 

iroh-olv 

OpVtO'OLV 

Plu.    N.V. 

(f)a)T-a 

7r6B-€<; 

opvld'€<: 

G. 

(j)COT'(OV 

TToB-cov 

6pvtd-(ov 

D. 

(JXOCTL 

irocrl 

opvlaL 

A. 

<^S)T-a 

TToS-a^ 

6pvld'a<; 

a.  As  in  the  o-declension,  the  accusative  and 
vocative  of  neuters  in  the  consonant  declension  are 
like  the  nominative.  Before  -9  or  -o-^,  the  stem- 
consonant  T,  S,  or  6  is  dropped.  The  nominative 
7rou9  is  irregular.  The  ending  of  the  accusative 
singular  of  masculines  and  feminines  is  -a;  but 
opvh  usually  has  opvlv. 

6.  For  the  accent  of  monosyUabic  stems  see  75,  h.    But  the 
genitive  dual  and  plural  of  <^cus  do  not  follow  this  rule. 


apxfo 
ap^aLO^;^  -a,  -ov 


80.   Vocabulary. 

(he  firsts  hence)  (1)  hegin^  (2)  rule. 

(1)  beginning^  (2)  government. 

ancient  (archaeo-logy). 

corner^  angle  (deca-gon). 
SeW (indeclinable)  ten  (deca-gon). 
f)  Se/cw,  'dho<^         company  of  ten^  decad  (decade). 
eirrd  (indecl.)        seven  (hept-archy). 
eySSo/>to9,  -^,  'Ov        seventh. 

7)  ey88o/ia9,  -dho^     week.,  seven  days  (hebdomadal), 
efo),  adv.  w.  gen.,  outside  (exo-tic). 
eo-ft),  adv.  w.  gen.,  inside^  within  (eso-teric). 
oKir^oLy  -aif  -a  in  plural,  few  (olig-archy), 

o,  7]  opvl^y  '9o<^        bird  (ornith-ology). 


i 


70 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[81- 


82] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


71 


! 


6,  rj  irai^j  iraiho^^  child. 

irathevco  educate  (treat  as  a  child^. 

5.  r        ..{child-leader,  teacher,  paed-afifo&nie 

S09 


o  7ra^( 


O  7rOU9,  TTO 

<f)€pco 

TO  </)a)9,  (J>(ot6<; 


i     (or  ped-agogue). 
/i9(?^  (anti-podes). 

iCAr^g  (tri-cycle). 

5^ar,  carri/  (Latin  fero). 

light  (photo -graph). 

81.   Exercises. 


I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  ''Ottov  (where^  oXcyoc  dvOpcoiroc  dp^ovo-c  tov 
SjjfJkov,'^  evravOd  (there^  earLv  oXtyap'x^La  (oligarchy). 
2.  heKa  6pvl6e<i  yv/ivd^ovac  tou9  \dpvyya<;  iv  ycovia 
TOV  irapaheiaov.  3.  eTrra  filfcpol  TralSe^i  e^(o  tov 
irapaheiaov  iiKovovai  tS>v  opiAOcov.^  4.  ao(f>ol  iraih- 
aycoyol  tov<;  iralSaf;  TratSevovac.  5.  €a(o  tov  yv/Jr 
vacriov  elal  Tp€c^  Se/caSe9  dvOpcoircop.      6.  c'^ofiev  iv 

Tip  oXK(d  eTTTCL    ^c/3XLa  TCOV  dp'X^aicOV  TTOtrjT&V.        7.    TO 

<f>(0<;  TOV  rfKiov  TtjXe  (paiveTac.  8.  iv  ttj  dp^^  Trj<i 
TrpcoTT}^  i7rco-To\r]<i  dvayiyvwaKOfJuev  tov  dpyalov 
fivdov.  9.  ©609  /xoz/09  dpxet  (mon-arch)  t&v  dv6pd>- 
TTCOV  fcal  TCOV  do-Tpcov.  10.  77  yrj  (f>€p€L  SevSpa  koI 
TO  BevBpov  (^epeu  poha.  11.  oific  dpxaioLf;  ^c^Xloi<; 
fiovoL^    TratBevS/jieOa.       12.    77    KXifia^   Befca    7ro8a9^ 


'1  Vocative  Trat.    In  accent  Trats  is  like  <^cos  (see  79,  and  b), 

2  Verbs  of  beginning  and  ruling,  like  apx^j  govern  the  geni- 
tive instead  of  the  accusative. 

3  Verbs  of  hearing  and  perceiving,  like  d/cova>  and  alo-Oavofjuai, 
take  the  genitive  more  commonly  than  the  accusative. 

*  Ace.  of  extent,  as  in  Latin. 


fxaKpa  iaTt.  13.  TpeU  6/3So/iaSe9  elal  fiaKpo^  ;)^poi/o9 
T069  iratai.  14.  6  iracSaycoyo^  e^et  fUKpov  ^u^Xiov 
TrepX    tS)V  dp^aiwv   vTroKpcTcov,,   o   dvaytyvcoaKOvacv 

oXiyoL. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  stone  has  ten  corners  (deca-gon).  2.  The 
government  of  the  few  is  bad.  3.  With  the  first 
bird  we  see  seven  other  birds.  4.  The  seventh 
bird,  the  [one]  on  the  ladder,  is  an  overseer,  who 
is  educating  the  first  bird.  6.  [He]  who  begins 
war  is  not  wise.  6.  The  sun  shows  its  light  to 
the  earth.  7.  The  feet  of  the  children  are  in  the 
river.  8.  What  is  the  opinion  of  the  ancients 
about  the  government  of  the  few?  9.  The  actors 
are  leading  horses  which  carry  solid  gold.  10.  In 
a  few  weeks  we  shall  see  messengers  who  bear 
letters.  11.  Within  the  house  are  three  men  who 
rule  the  people.  12.  In  the  seventh  house  beyond 
the  corner  of  the  park  dwells  a  man  who  reads 
few  books.  13.  An  elder  brother  bears  the  child 
through  the  river. 

82.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  a.  Both  meanings  of  dpx^  (which  are  evi- 
dently nearly  related)  are  well  represented  in 
English.  Thus,  archaeo-logy  (dpxcuos:^  is  an  account 
of  ancient  things ;  archaic  (apxalfco^;^  -rj^  01/)  and 
archaism  also  refer  to  ancient  things^  but  with  a 
slightly  different  shade  of  meaning;  arche-tjrpe 
(apXi'Tviro^;')  was  originally  that  which  is  first 
struck  off  or  first  moulded  as  a  model  or  example. 


72 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[82— 


h.  Again,  an-archy  (avap'x^Ldi  av  'privative^  see 
60,  3,  i)  is  no-rule ;  mon-archy  (^yiovap^ia)  is  the 
rule  of  one ;  hept-archy,  the  rule  of  seven ;  dec-archy, 
the  rule  of  ten.  A  patri-arch  is  a  clan-ruler  (^ 
irarpia  clan^  from  irarijp^  Latin  pater,  father^ ; 
archives  (^rb  dpxelov,  government  house),  the  place 
where  government  records  are  kept,  or  the  records 
themselves.  Finally,  the  prefix  arch-  or  archi-  in 
arch-angel,  arch-bishop,  archi-episcopal,  archi-tect  (o 
T6KTC0V  builder},  etc.,  is  also  from  dpxco,  and  has 
come  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  chief  or  leader, 
with  many  words  not  from  Greek,  such  as  arch- 
duke,  s.Tch-thief,  etc.  When  used  with  words  not 
from  Greek,  or  with  words,  like  bishop,  so  thor- 
oughly Anglicized  that  the  Greek  origin  is  ob- 
scured, the  ch  of  arch-  is  pronounced  as  in  child; 
in  words  directly  from  Greek  ch  is  pronounced 
like  k. 

2.  TcDVid  appears  in  goni-o-meter  (^/xirpov),  and 
gives  the  syllable  -gon,  angle,  in  dia-gon-al  (Scd), 
poly-gon  (see  91,  12),  tri-gon-o-metry  (to  rpi-yoypop 
tri-angle  —  the  first  syllable  being  the  stem  of  rpeh 
—  and  fxerpov),  hex-a-gon  Qe^-d-ycovov ;  e^  six,  with 
an  -a-  which  seems  to  have  been  inserted  from 
analogy). 

3.  Ae/ca  appears  in  deca-logne,  and  in  many 
names  of  metric  weights  and  measures,  such  as 
deca-gram  (see  91,  4),  deca-meter. 

4.  From  the  stem  of  i^Sofid^  we  have  hebdom- 
adal, a  clumsy  word  for  weekly. 

5.  An  exotic  plant  is  one  from  outside  (e^rw), 


8d] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


73 


foreign.  Esoteric  {eo-ay)  doctrines  are,  so  to  speak, 
the  "  inside,^^  or  secret,  doctrines,  contrasted  with 
the  exoteric,  or  outside,  public,  doctrines,  which 
may  be  imparted  to  everybody. 

6.  UaU  takes  the  forms  -paed-  and  -ped-;  the 
latter  syllable  must  not  be  confounded  with  ped 
in  derivatives  of  Latin  pes,  pedis,  foot.  A  ped-o- 
baptist  is  one  who  believes  in  child-baptism  (ySaTr- 
Ttfft)  baptize).  Ortho-ped-y  is  child  straightening 
(^6p06<;),  curing  children's  deformities.  From 
iraiheid  education  QjraLhevoi)  we  obtain  en-cyclo- 
paedia and  cyclo-paedia  (eV  and  kvkXo^). 

7.  The  nominative  ttou?  appears  in  poly-pus, 
many-footed  (see  91,  12),  which  is  also  shortened 
to  poly-p.  The  stem-form  -pod-  is  seen  in  chir-o- 
pod-ist  Qx^Lp),  a  healer  of  hands  and  feet,  and  tri- 
pod (rpeh),  and  in  numerous  scientific  words  like 
cephal-o-pod  (^fC€(f>aXrj).  Finally,  anti-pode  has  been 
formed  as  the  singular  of  anti-pod-es  (^dprl),  and 
thus  has  final  e. 

8.  Tpei^  is  also  seen  in  tri-logy,  a  series  of  three 
connected  plays,  and  in  tri-cycle  (/^i;/cXo9). 

9.  Peri-phery  (Trept  and  <f>epco)  is  the  exact 
equivalent,  etymologically,  of  circum-ference,  from 
Latin  circum  and  fero  ;  but  the  latter  is  used  only 
of  circles  and  spheres,  while  the  former  is  used  of 
other  figures.  The  root  of  ^e/oa>  takes  also  the 
form  ^op-.  A  meta-phor  (^/jL€Ta-(f>opa)  is,  in  a  cer- 
tain sense,  a  trans-fer  (Latin  trans  and  fero)  of 
meaning;  as  when  a  soldier  is  called  a  lion  to 
denote  that  he  is  brave,  the  word  lion  contains  a 
meta-phor. 


74 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[83— 


10.  Phos-phorus  (<^a)9-<^opo9)  signifies  light-bearer. 
The  stem  (fxor-  is  found  in  phot-o-graph  Q^pd^ay 
means  to  draw  or  paint  as  well  as  to  write ;  com- 
pare graphic,  31,  4),  phot-o-sphere  {(T<f>alpa^  the 
burning  gas  which  envelopes  the  sun ;  phot-o- 
meter,  an  instrument  for  measuring  the  quantity 
of  light;  phot-o-Iitho-graph  (XWo^;),  a  print  from  a 
stone  on  which  the  picture  has  been  printed  by 
photography. 


XIV. 
83. 

Sing.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Consonant  Declension:  Stems  in 

-l^  and  'P', 
6  (Sa^/xoz^-)       77  (jeIkov-^ 


\ 


\ 


divinity 
Baificov 
Bacfioif'0<; 
halfiov't 
haifiov-a 
haljjiov 

Dual  N.  A .  V.  haifjLov-e 

G.  D.  ZaLjJLOV-OLV 


Plu. 


N.V. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


haifjuov-e^ 
Satfiov-cov 
SaLfioac 
BaLfJLOP-a<; 


image 

€L/Ca)V 

elKov-os: 

EiKOV-l 

elfcop-a 
elfccov 

euKov-e 

€Lf€OV-OLV 

€LfCO  !/-€<; 
€L/COV-COV 

elfcocrc 

CLKOV-a^i 


6  Cpv'^op') 

orator 
prjTcop 
pr)TOp'0<;  . 
prjTOp-i 
prjTop-a 

pfjTOp 

prjrop-e 
prjTop'Oiv 

pr)Top'€f; 
prfTop-cov 
prjTop'at 
priTop-af; 


a.  Stems  in  -ih  and  -p-  omit  the  nominative  end- 
ing -9,  and  lengthen  a  preceding  e.or  o  to  77  or  o). 
Observe  that  the  long  vowel  is  retained  in  the 
vocative  singular  if  accented,  otherwise  not.  In 
the  dative  plural  v  before  -at  is  dropped. 


84] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


75 


o  aycov,  aycovo^^ 
dyayvi^ofiac,  dep., 

avT-aycom^o/jLat  (avri 
and  a7.),  dep., 

o  avT'aycoPLaT7](;,  -ov 


J    / 


o  a7]p,  aepof^ 
o  a6Xo(;,  'ov 
TO  a6\oVy  "Ov 
o  dO\r)T7]<;y  'ov 
o  Sat/JLcop,  'Opo<^ 
r]  elKcoVy  -ovo^i 
€pr)fjLo<;,  -77,  'OP 
o  /capcop,  '6po<; 
fcXdco 
rj  pav^ 

O  PaVTT}^,  'OV 

TO  TTVp 

0  pi]T(Op,  -OpO^ 

X^^pa-craa) 

6  %a/?a/cT?7/),  -Vpo^: 


84.    Vocahilary. 
contest  (agony). 
struggle,   engage  in  a  contest 
(agonize). 

struggle  against  (ant-agonize). 

ant-agonist, 
air. 

athletic  game, 
prize. 
athlete. 

divinity,  spirit  (demon). 
image,  statue  (icon-oclasm). 
solitary,  lonely  (erem-ite). 
measuring-rod,  rule  (canon). 
break  (icono-clasm). 
ship  (nausea). 
sailor  (nant-ical). 
fire  (pjT-otechnics). 
orator  (rhetor). 
pointed  stake, 
scratch. 

mark  {engraved  or  stamped  on 
something.    Character) . 


85.   Exercises. 
I.   Translate  into  English. 
1.  'H    y\o,cT(Ta    Tov    pr^Topo^    dpx€t    Tov    Srjfiov. 


I  From  iyco :    (i)  a  gathering,  (2)  a  gathering  for  athletic 
contests,  (3)  contest. 


76 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[86— 


2.   oXiryoL  ddXrjral  aOXa  (fyepovatv  ix  rcov   aycovcov. 
8.  iv  Toh  aySxTLV  djayvL^ovrac  ol  aOXTjral  yvfivot.^ 
4.   0  7ra?9  TTOLeet  irvp  iv  ycovla  rov  ol/cov.     5.  x^P^^- 
(T€L^  TTiv  elKova  Tov  tS)v  vavrSyv  Oeov,  koI  KXdei  rov 
Tov  opvlOo^  TToSa.       6.   oy  /caKO<;  iraU  eart ;     7.    97 
vav<;    TOV   xp^fov    rcov    ddXrjrcov    (fyepei.       8.    opvlv 
oyireade  iv  rS  dipt.     9.  dyaObv  Saifxova  exei  w?  (a^) 
iiridKOirov.        10.    o    tov    viroKptTov     dvTaycovKTTrj^; 
fcXdec  Ta9  dpxacd^  eUova^  (icon-0-clast)   tcov  Oecov. 
11.^  opday  KpcTTjv  opOoVy  09  oXiyov^  (f>LXov<;  exec  fcal 
(f)aLV€Tat  eprjfMo^;.      12.   0  iTridKOTro^  fiUKpov  fcavova 
<f>ep€i  Koi  opdeL  Tov^  fJilKpov<;  iralSa^;  ot  iirl  tS  fcpv- 
aToXXo)  elaL     13.  ol  iralSe^  TVTTTOvat  tov  dOXrjTJjv. 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.    The  child  bears   [away]  the  first  prize.     2. 

Through  the   air  are   borne   the  voices  of  birds. 

3.  In  the  air  are  good  spirits  who  are  guardians 

of  men.      4.   Small  marks  appear   on   the   gold. 

5.  The  statues  in  the  park  appear  lonely. .    6.  The 

athlete   has   a   measuring-rod  seven   feet  2    long. 

7.  The  orator  is  an  antagonist  of  a  sailor  in  the 

first  contest  of  the  season.     8.  The  measuring-rod 

makes  a  long  mark  on  the  head  of  the  ancient 

mariner.      9.   Little  children   break  the  ice  with 

stones.     10.   The  fire  is  seen  afar.     11.  We  are 

reading  the  tale  of  the  ancient  mariner.     12.  A 

wise   orator   by  a   few   words   leads   the  people. 

13.  Shall  we  see  a  contest  of  athletes  under  the 


1  This  was  the  Greek  custom.         2  Accusative  of  extent. 


86] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


77 


tree  ?     14.  The  fear  of  God  is  the  beginning  of 
wisdom. 

86.   JVotes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Agony  (dycovLd,  another  form  for  dycov)  is  prop- 
erly struggle,  then  the  pain  of  struggle  in  a  contest, 
but  has  come  to  include  any  severe  pain  or  anguish. 
From  dycovL^ofiat  is  formed  dycovcaTT]^  contestant; 
this  with  7rpa>To<;  gives  prot-agonist,  first  contestant, 
used  especially  of  the  leading  actor  in  a  Greek 
play. 

2.  Aer-o-naut  is  an  air-sailor;  aer-o-lite,  a  stone 
which  falls  from  the  air.  As  aer  was  taken  from 
Greek  into  Latin,  some  of  our  derivatives  have 
Latin  endings  or  are  compounded  with  Latin 
words.  Such  are  aer-/aZ,  aer-a^^,  aer-//brm.  Air 
has  been  further  changed  by  coming  through 
French. 

3.  Daemon,  or  demon,  now  denotes  bad  spirits 
only,  quite  differently  from  Greek  usage  ;  and 
daimon  is  sometimes  used  in  the  more  general 
sense  of  SacfMcov.  This  sense  is  retained  in  dai- 
monic,  and  sometimes,  though  not  usually,  in  dae- 
monic;  demoniac  and  demon-ology  are  connected 
rather  with  demon. 

4.  Icon-o-clasm  is  the  act  of  an  icon-o-clast ;  icon- 
o-graphy  is  the  description  of  images,  statues,  or 
pictures. 

5.  Eremite  (iprjfitTr)^,  from  eprj/io^)  is  less  com- 
mon than  hermit,  the  corrupted  form  of  the  same 
word. 


78 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[86— 


6.  The  various  meanings  of  canon  are  all  more 
or  less  closely  connected  with  the  figurative  sense 
of  rule.  For  example,  it  denotes  a  rule  of  the 
church;  the  list  of  sacred  books  accepted  by  the 
church  as  belonging  to  the  Bible ;  the  authoritative 
list  of  saints,  as  in  the  Roman  Catholic  church. 
Hence  we  have  canonical  and  canonize. 

7.  Naur/Xo?,  which  is  merely  another  form  of 
vavTr}(;^  is  Latinized  into  nautilus,  a  little  shell-fish 
that  sails  over  the  water  in  its  shell.  The  con- 
nection between  vav^;  and  nausea  is  plain  to  any 
one  who  has  been  sea-sick. 

8.  On  a  pjrre  (from  TrOp)  the  dead  were  burned, 
among  the  Greeks  and  Romans.  Pjrr-o-technics  is 
the  art  (re^^i^Ty)  of  making  fire-works.  The  em-pjrr- 
ean  (from  efi'irvpo^;  in  fire  or  on  fire^  iv  and  irvp)  is 
the  highest  heaven^  which  the  ancients  imagined  to 
be  pure  fire. 

9.  Ehetoric  is  primarily  ^  pr^TopiKr]  Texvv  ^^^  ^^^ 
of  an  orator ;  but  the  term  is  now  used  to  denote 
the  art  of  composition^  while  oratory  has  more  ref- 
erence to  the  art  of  speaking  in  public. 

10.  The  primary  force  of  character  is  still  seen 
in  its  sense  of  a  distinctive  mark^  as  a  letter, 
figure,  or  sign.  Then  the  word  came  to  signify 
the  sum  of  those  invisible  marks  of  one's  nature, 
the  qualities  of  soul  which  make  up  what  is  called 
character.  Hence  characterize  {x^pa/crr^pi^o))  and 
characteristic. 

11.  In  this  and  former  chapters  we  have  met 
several  Greek  verbs  derived  from  nouns  and  end- 


87] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


79 


ing  in  -i^co  or  -L^ofiac.  This  ending  -/fo)  Q-i^ofiai) 
was  used  very  freely  in  Greek  to  change  nouns 
into  verbs ;  and  so  many  Greek  verbs  have  been 
taken  into  English  with  the  termination  -ize  (or 
-ise)  that  this  ending  itself  has  been  pretty  fully 
naturalized,  and  is  added  to  many  nouns  and 
adjectives  which  have  themselves  nothing  to  do 
with  Greek.  Also,  from  the  same  class  of  verbs 
were  formed  nouns  in  Ho-fio^;  and  -cari]^^  which 
have  given  us  the  endings  -ism  and  -ist. 


XV.   Consonant  Declension:   Neuter  Stems 

IN   -ar-  AND   -e<r-.      IIoXu?. 


87. 


Sing.  N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 

Dual  N.  A.  V. 
G.D. 

Plu.   N.V. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


TO  (jTvevpiaT'^ 
breath 

irvevfJLa 

irvevfiar-o^ 

TTvevfiaT'C 

TTpevfia 

TTPevfjLa 

7rvev/jLaT'€ 
irvevfidr-OLV 

irveviMar-a 
TTvevfJuaT'COp 
irvevfJLaau 
irvevfiar-a 


TO  QyevecT-^ 

race 

y€V€'0^ 
y€P€L 

yepo^i 
yepo^ 

ry€P€'€ 
y6P€-0iP 

yepe-a 
yepe-(OP 
ytpe-ai 
yeP€'a 


a.  All  neuter  nominatives  singular  in  -a  have 
stems  in  -ar-;    final  r  of  the  stem  is  dropped  in 


80 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[89- 


the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  singular, 
which  take  no  case-ending.  This  r  often  appears 
in  English  derivatives. 

h.  Stems  in  -ecr-  change  the  last  syllable  to  -09  in 
the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  singular. 
This  is  the  same  vowel-change  which  we  have 
already  met  in  Xeyco,  \0709 ;  rpeirw^  rpoTro^^  (see 
57,  7)  ;  areWco,  o't6\o<;  (see  60,  7)  ;  v€/jlco,  vo/iof; ; 
aKeirrofiaty  aKoiro^^  (pepco,  (^6po<^  (see  82,  9).  Be- 
tween two  vowels,  and  before  -ctl^  a  is  dropped. 

88.  The  adjective  7roXv<;,  ttoW/;,  ttoXv  much 
(plural,  many')  has  the  stem  ttoXv-  in  some  forms, 
and  in  others  the  stem  ttoXXo-  (feminine,  iroWa). 


Sing.  N. 

7ro\u9 

ttoXXt] 

TTOXv 

G. 

TToWov 

TToXXrjf; 

TTOXXOV 

D. 

iroXXco 

TToXXr) 

TToXXo) 

A. 

TTOXVV 

iroXXriv 

TToXv 

V. 

TToXv 

iroXXrj 

TToXv 

(Dual  wanting.) 

Plu.   N.V. 

TTOXXOL 

iroXXaL 

TToXXa 

G. 

iroXXcov 

TToXXcov 

iroXXcop 

D. 

TToXXolf; 

7roXXaL<i 

7roXXo?9 

A. 

TTOXXOV^ 

TToXXa^ 

TToXXd 

• 

89.    Vocabulary. 

aWo9,  -Vy  '0^ 

other  (allo-pathy). 

dpiaro^y  -rj,  -oi 

f 

best  (aristo-crat). 

90] 

o  ydfio^;,  -ov 
yiyvojjLac  ^ 

7)  yeveuy  -a9  (fr. 

yiyvoixat) 
TO  ytvo^,  -609  (fr. 

yiyvojbLat) 
TO  ypdjJLfjLa,  -T0<; 

(fr.  ypdcfxo) 
TO  eZSo9,  -eo9 
KaXo^y  -J],  -OP 

TO  /CaX\09,  -609 
TO  KpdTO^y  -€09 

KpaTeo)  (fr.  KpdTo^) 

OfJLOLO^y  -a,  'OV 

ofjLoVy  adv., 

TO  OVV/JLa,  -T09 

TO  7rd0o<;,  -eo9 
TO  TTvev/jLa,  -T09 
O  TTVeVflCOVy  -ovo^ 

7roXu9,  7roXX7]y  iroXv 
irpoy  prep.  w.  gen., 
TO  ')^pa)fjLay  -TO 9 
TO  yfrevBo^y  -609 


CONSONANT  UECLENSION. 


81 


marriage  (poly-gam-y). 
become  J    be   born^    (of  events) 
take  place. 

family  (genea-logy). 
race^  hind  (Latin  genus). 

writing^  letter  (tele-gram). 

shape^  figure  (kal-eido-scope). 
beautiful  (kal-eidoscope). 
beauty, 
strength. 

rule  (aristo-crat). 
like  (homoeo-pathy). 
together. 

name  (syn-onym). 
feeling^  passion  (pathos). 
breathy  zvind  (pneumat-ie}. 
lung  (pneumon-ia). 
much^  plural  many  (poly-gamy). 
before  (pro-gram). 
color  (chrome). 
falsehood  (pseud-onym). 


»  / 


1  Declined  like  ai/ros  (see  66  and  note  ^). 


90.    Exercises. 

I.   Translate  into  English. 

1.     'Ez^    Ty    dpidTrj    apyjj    01    dpiaTOL    KpaTeovai 
(aristo-crat,  aristo-cracy).     2.  r]  dp'^fj  fcaxTj  iaTcv  el 

."        "—•      '  '-  l—.»lll  III.         ■■  ■ .  ,„..,_,  ^  „,_  ,       „„  ,1  .       ^, I  11^     IWIB^^ 

1  Root  y€v-'j  compare  Latin  gigno,  genui,  genus^ 


-rsrrrrcrm 


82 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[90— 


0/)  KaKo^  hrjfxo^  Kpareei  (demo-cracy)  tmv  apiarayv 
ttoXItcov.^  3.  ol  0€ol  vefjLovaL  tm  tmp  dvOpdoTrcov 
y€V€L  KuWo^  Kol  fcpciTO^;  Kol  ra  aXXa  uyaOd.  4.  rd 
TTciOea  TOiv  decov  ofioia  rol^  tS)v  dvOpcoircov  TrdOealv  ^ 
ecac,      5.    TToXXal  jeveal   olfceovcrcv   o/nov    rrjv  yrjv, 

6.  ol  KoXol  Kal  dyadol  Tralhe^  ov  Xeyovai  yjrevSea. 

7.  TO  %/3w/ia  Tcov  iirl  t(S  j3t/3Xup  ypafifidrcov  opuoLov 
i(TTL  xP^o-<?'  8.  ol  irvevpuove^  rov  dOXrjrov  yvpuvd- 
^ovrai  irpo  rov  dycovo^,  fcal  rj  adp^  yiyverai  opioid 
XiOw.  9.  TL  iaTLv  iv  ovvp^art ;  10.  KaXd  ecSea 
aKCTrrdp^eOa  (kal-eido-scope).  11.  ol  6pvl6e<;  elat 
iroXXwv  xP^f^^'^^^^  (poly-chrome).  12.  'jrocrjTal 
ypd(f)ovcn  irepl  rov  ydpLov  xdXXeo^;  koX  Kpdreo^. 
13.  iroXXol  TTorapLol  p^a/cpd  ovvpbara  e^pvai.  14.  ov 
TToXv  <f>a)<;  exop^ev  etc  rSyv  darpcov.  15.  &  Trat,  aladd- 
V6l  TO  KpdTO^  TCOV  iTvevpLaTcov ; 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  In  many  contests  the  best  men  bear  [away] 
the  prizes.  2.  The  athlete's  family  has  many 
marks  of  beauty.  3.  The  sailor's  horses  are  from 
a  beautiful  race.  4.  The  child  has  a  good  name 
and  a  figure  which  is  like  the  statues  of  the  gods. 
5.  You  are  painting  (ypd(f>co)  the  letters  with 
beautiful  colors.  6.  Men  do  not  rule  the  winds. 
7.  The  ship  is  borne  by  the  strength  of  the  winds. 


1  As  a  verb  of  ruling  Kparim  takes  the  genitive  (see  81, 
L,  1). 

2  "O/xoios  takes  the  dative,  like  Icroq  (see  72  and  note  i). 

3  Predicate  genitive,  used  as  in  Latin. 


91] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


83 


8.  The  orators  are  exercising  their  lungs ;  they  are 
reading  together  a  song  about  marriage.  9.  The 
marriage  takes-place  before  the  season  of  roses. 
10.  We  have  like  feelings  (homoeo-pathy)  with 
other  men.  11.  In  the  books  of  ancient  orators 
are  not  a  few  falsehoods.  12.  In  the  best  schools 
children  are  educated  together.  13.  The  soli- 
tary athlete  shows  much  strength,  but  not  much 
beauty. 

91.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Allo-pathy  (aXXo^  Tra^o?),  the  use  of  such 
medicines  as  will  produce  effects  different  from 
those  produced  by  the  disease,  is  contrasted,  as  a 
mode  of  treating  disease,  with  homeo-pathy  (see  14, 5^). 

2.  From  ydpo<;  we  obtain  mono-gamy  (/^cro?), 
poly-gamy  (ttoXu;),  and  6i-gamy;  the  last  is  another 
instance  of  the  combination  of  a  Latin  with  a 
Greek  element.     (Compare  bi-cjcle,  60,  5.) 

3.  Hetero-geneous  Qirepo-yevf]^;  erepo^  and  761/09) 
means  of  differeiit  kinds,  and  is  contrasted  with 
homo-geneous  (opuo-^evri^ ;  for  opLo-  see  91,  8)  of  the 
same  kind,  or  all  of  one  kind.  Eu-gene  (^ebyevrj^;, 
from  ev  and  761/09)  and  its  feminine  Eu-genia,  or 
Eu-genie  (the  French  form),  signify  well-born,  or 
of  good  race.  The  root  of  yiyvop^ai  takes  the  form 
70J/-  (see  87,  h,  second  sentence)  in  theo-gony  (^eo- 
yovid,  ^609),  hirtJi  of  the  gods,  or  genealogy  of  the 
gods  ;  also  in  cosmo-gony,  hirth  of  the  universe. 

4.  The  syllable  -gram,  from  ypdp^p^a,  has  been 
already  given,  in  some  words,  as  from  ypd^co  (epi- 


84 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[91- 


91] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


85 


gram,  68,  6;  mono-gram,  68,  9;  deca-gram,  82,  3). 
Further,  pro-gram  (tt/oo)  is  literally  a  before-writing; 
grammar  was  first  applied  to  tvritten  language  ;  the 
adjective  grammatical  shows  the  r  of  the  stem. 

5.  We  have  seen  that  in  many  compounds  the 
vowel  -0-  is  inserted  to  connect  the  two  parts, 
sometimes  taking  the  place  of  a  different  vowel  at 
the  end  of  the  first  stem.  (Compare  51,  1.)  In 
spher-oid  (from  cr^aipa),  aster-old  (from  aarrip, 
do-rpov),  delt-oid  (from  SeXra),  anthrop-oid  (in  which, 
if  it  stood  by  itself,  one  might  say  that  the  o  be- 
longed to  the  stem  of  dvOpcoTro^),  this  o  has  been 
contracted  with  id,  the  remnant  of  eI8o9,  into  the 
syllable  -oid.  Then,  as  this  ending  occurred  so 
frequently  (especially  in  technical  or  scientific 
words),  the  syllable  -oid  has  come  to  be  regarded 
as  a  simple  suffix,  meaning  like,  which  may  be 
added  to  words  from  Latin  as  well  as  to  words 
from  Greek.  Thus  ov-oid  (Latin  ovum,  egg),  albu- 
mm-oid,  etc.  The  syllable  -ide,  frequent  in  chem- 
ical terms,  is  also  from  elSo?. 

6.  Instead  of  /cakc^  or  AraXXo?,  the  related  form 
fcaWc-  was  used  in  composition.  This  gives  calli- 
in  caUi-graphy,  calli-sthenics  (cr^eVo?,  -eo9,  strength, 
nearly  equivalent  to  Kpdro^). 

7.  From  fcpdro^,  Kpareco,  we  have  the  forms 
-crat-ic  and  -cracy  in  aristo-crat,  aristo-cracy ;  demo- 
crat, demo-cracy ;  auto-crat  (^avro^} ;  theo-cracy 
QOeo^;)  ;  pluto-crat,  pluto-cracy  (ttXoOto?,  -ov  icealtK). 
These  words  have  made  the  meaning  of  the  part 
from  KpdTo<;  so  familiar,  that  -crat  and  .-cracy  are 


added  to  a  few  words  not  from  Greek.  Thus 
lureaU'Ci^iy  bureau-CTSLCj ;  and  mob-o-crsLCj  is  some- 
times heard  instead  of  the  more  regular  ochlo-cracy 
(o;j^Xo9,  -ov  mob). 

8.  The  adverb  ofiov  is  a  genitive  form  of  the  ad- 
jective 6yLto9,  -?7,  -01/  same,  which  early  passed  out 
of  common  use.  But  a  number  of  compounds  of 
ofco9  remained  in  common  use,  and  we  have  in 
English  homo-geneous  (^ofio-yeprj^; ;  see  91,  3) ;  hom- 
onym, hom-onymous  (^ovv/jlo),  of  the  same  name,  that 
is,  pronounced  alike. 

9.  Besides  hom-onym,  ovvfia  gives  us  an-onjrmous 
(^dv-  privative ;  see  60,  3,  5) ;  syn-onjrm  (avv),  a 
word  of  like  meaning  with  another  (to  be  distin- 
guished from  hom-onym) ;  pseud-onym  (-^€1)809) ; 
also  ep-onymous  (iiri),  giving  a  name  to,  and  ep- 
onym,  a  na7ne  of  a  person  given  to  a  people  or  place. 
A  patr-onymic  is  a  name  derived  from  that  of  a 
father  (jrarrip,  irarp-o^  father,  Latin  pater)  or  other 
ancestor.  Met-onymy  (^yierd  indicating  change  ;  see 
60,  6)  is  a  rhetorical  figure  consisting  in  a  certain 
kind  of  change  of  name. 

10.  From  Trddo^  are  derived  pathetic  (^TraOrjnKo^), 
a-pathetic  and  a-pathy  (alpha  privative;  see  60,  3, 6), 
anti-pathy  (dvri),  sjrm-pathy  (avv),  hydr-o-pathy  (the 
treatment  of  disease  by  water,  vZcop),  and  path-o- 
logy,  the  theory  or  doctrine  of  disease, 

11.  The  T  of  TTvevfjbar-  appears  in  pneumatic. 

12.  The  representative  of  ttoXv^  in  English  is 
poly-  with  the  force  of  the  plural,  many,  which  has 
already  been  mentioned  with  a  number  of  com- 


86 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[92— 


94] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


87 


pounds.      (See  41,   1;    60,  3,   c?;   60,    8;    82,   2; 
82,  7.)      ^ 

13.  Upo  appears  in  pro-gnosis  Qytypcoa-Kco^^  /wc?^- 
ment  beforehand^  especially  as  to  the  probable 
course  and  result  of  a  disease,  whence  pro-gnostic 
and  pro-gnosticate. 

14.  From  '^pcofia  we  have  mono-chrome  (/xoz/09), 
poly-chrome,  chrom-o-litho-graph  (see  67,  I.,  4),  and 
the  abbreviated  chromo.  Chromatic,  pertaining  to 
colors,  retains  the  stem.  It  is  most  often  used  of 
a  musical  scale  of  which  the  intervals  are  all  half- 
tones, the  intermediate  tones  having,  been  at  one 
time  commonly  written  in  colors. 

XVI.  Consonant  Declension:  Stems  in  -c- 

AND  -eu-.     Avvafiac. 

92. 


rj  (ttoX^-) 

0  (^^aatXev-^ 

city 

king 

Sing.  N. 

7roXc-<; 

^aaiXeiHi 

G. 

7ro\e-ft)9 

fiao-tXi'COf; 

D. 

TToXec 

/SaatXet 

A. 

iroKi'V 

fiaacXi'd 

V. 

ttoXl 

^aatXev 

DualN.A.V. 

TToXe-e 

fiaaiXe-e 

G.D. 

iroXe-OLV 

fiaaiXe-OLV 

Plu.    N. 

7ro\e-€9 

fiaacX€'€<: 

G. 

iroXe-cov 

fiao-cXe-cov 

D. 

TToXe-at 

^aavXev-cn 

A. 

^      TToXeis  ; 

fiaa-iXi'd^ 

a.  Stems  in  -i-  take  -a>9,  instead  of  -09,  in  the 
genitive  singular,  and  take  -v  in  the  accusative 
singular.  The  vowel  c  appears  only  in  the  nomi- 
native, accusative,  and  vocative  singular;  else- 
where €  (in  the  accusative  plural  e^  has  taken  its 
place. 

b.  The  genitive  singular  and  plural  of  stems  in  -t-  still  keep 
the  accent  on  the  antepenult, 

c.  Stems  in  -ev-  lose  v  before  a  vowel  in  the  end- 
ing;  they  take  -w?  in  the  genitive  singular,  -a  in 
the  accusative  singular,  and  -d<;  in  the  accusative 
plural. 

93.  The  verb  Bvvafiat  can^  am  ahle^  is  a  deponent, 
and,  like  Latin  possum^  takes  the  infinitive  in 
dependence  upon  it.    It  is  conjugated  as  follows : 


Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Dual  2 
8 

Plu.  1 
2 
8 


hvva-fiau 
Swa-crac 
Svpa-rac 

hvva-aOov 
hvva-aOov 

hvvd-fieda 

hvva-aOe 

^vva-prac 


94.  Vocabulary. 

TO  aKpov,  'ov  top^  upper  part  (acro-stic). 

77  cLKpo-iroXi^iy  -60)9  citadel^  acro-polis. 

6  ^aacXev^,  -e<w9  king. 

rj  yiveai^i  -60)9  birth^  origin^  genesis. 


88 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[96— 


y\v(f>Q) 
St9,  adv., 

Svva/jLac 
rj  hvvaiiL^,  -eft)9 
o  Svvda'T7]<;,  'ov 
iepo<;y  -a,  -ov 
6  iepev^y  -ico^ 

rj  \v<TL^,  -ea>9 
ava-Xvco 

7)   avd-XvcTL^y  -66i)9 
TO  fJLtcrO^,  -609 

ve/cpo^,  -a,  -6v 
j/eo9,  -a,  'OV 

T)  TTOXc^y  -66)9 
0  (TTL^O^y  -OV 

rdaaeo 
<pv(o 

7}  (f>V(Ti^,  -60)9 
TO  (f>VT6vy  'OV 


carve  (hiero-glyph-ic). 

twice^  related  to  hvo  two. 

can^  am  able. 

force^  power  (dynamite). 

ruler ^  djmast  (dynasty). 

sacred  (hiero-glyphic). 

priest  (hier-archy). 

loose^  undo^  let  loose. 

a  loosing^  setting  free. 

unloose^  take  apart ^  ana-lyze. 

an    undoing^    taking   apart^ 
ana-lysis. 

hatred  (mis-anthrope). 

dead  (necro-polis). 

new^  young  (neo-phyte). 

city  (necro-polis). 

line  (as  of  writing). 

arrange  (tactics). 

arrangement  (syn-tax). 

make  grow. 
(  (originally   growth^   then) 
(      nature  (physical). 

plant  (neo-phyte). 

95.  Exercises. 


I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  Ofc  iepee^  iv  rrj  dfcpoTrdXec  y\v(f)ovcrc  ypd/x/xara 
eiri  \i6oL<;.  2.  ev  rol^  dp'^^alot^  ^l^XIol^  dvayiyvd}- 
(TKOfiev  irepi  Tri<^  rov  Koo-fiov  yeveaeco^;  (cosmo-gony). 
3.   01  ovvdarac  iroWrjv  Bvvaficv  eyovat  fcal  fcpareov- 


65] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


89 


ac  TToWcov  dvdpcoTTCov.  4.  BU  dvayLyvj!)<T/c€L  6  ^aat^ 
\6L'9  TO  veov  ^l^Xlov  TrepX  Tf}<;  t&v  darpoip  rci^eo)?. 
6.  iv  TTJ  via  iroXei  (Nea-polis,  Naples)  ytyveTac  viov 
761/09.  6.  TToXXal  Kal  KaXai  elacP  al  r&P  vetcptoP 
7roX669  (necro-polis).  7.  y  Bvvap,L<;  Tov  rfxLov  (f>v€i  Tk 
(f>vTd.  8.  TO  fjLcao^  dv6pd}nro)v  (mis-ajithropy)  KUfCoP 
7rd6o<;  eVrt.  9.  ol  6eol  Xvova-t  Ta  irpevp^aTa^  Kal  rf 
vav^  Kal  Ta  vea  (f)VTa  KXdoPTau  10.  al  Peat  BvPaP^ 
Tat  dvaXv€LV  to  (J^vtov^  to  ovvfia  ov  SvvaPTat  Xdyetv. 
11.  Zvvaaai  ttjv  tcjv  daTpcov  (f)vatv  XiyeiP  ;  12.  oi 
iepee^  olKeovatv  ev  ttj  d/cpOTroXety  dXXa  ov  iroXv  Kpar 
T09  €Xov(TL.  13.  TToXXol  GTix^i  ypd(f>ovTat  itepl  Tr)<; 
(TO(}>w  TOV  veov  hwdcTov.  14.  97  7rat9  fiavOdvei 
a)Bf)v  BeKa  (ttl^ov^  fiaKpav, 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  sacred  writings  are  carved  on  stones. 
2.  The  priests  rule  (hier-archy)  the  city,  and  ar- 
range the  sacred  [things].  3.  The  birth  of  a 
young  king  is  reported  in  the  sacred  city.  4.  The 
overseer  takes-apart  and  examines  the  new  ma- 
chine. 5.  The  force  of  the  wind  breaks  many 
trees.  6.  The  rulers  come-to-know  the  hatred  of 
the  citizens.  7.  The  priests  announce  the  loosing 
of  the  sacred  birds.  8.  Sailors  cannot  rule  the 
winds.  9.  Man  is  by  nature  a  little  world  (micro- 
cosm). 10.  The  plant  lives  in  the  air  and  has  a 
long  name.  11.  Many  races  of  men  arrange  their 
houses  in  cities,  and  have  kings  and  priests  who 
make  laws.  12.  In  the  sacred  books  are  many 
tales  about  the  birth  of  the  gods.     13.  The  wise 


90 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[96— 


man  writes  a  letter  to  the  ruler  about  the  nature 
of  the  laws.     14.  The  top  of  the  tree  is  dead. 

96.  Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  An  acro-stic  {aKpov  and  ari'^p^;^  -ov  verse  or 
line)  is  a  series  of  lines  of  which  the  first  or  last 
letters,  or  both,  form  a  word  or  words.  A  di-stich 
,(S4-  representing  St9  or  Suo)  is  a  couplet,  or  two 
lines  making  complete  sense.  This  prefix  di-, 
meaning  double,  or  two,  appears  in  a  number  of 
derivatives,  as  di-graph,  two  letters  standing  for  one 
sound  (ph,  for  example)  ;  di-morphic  or  di-morphous, 
appearing  under  two  forms;  di-phthong  (see  68,  9)  ; 
di-lemma  (see  110,  8)  ;  di-(s)syUable  (see  110,  8). 
This  prefix  must  not  be  confused  with  the  di-  from 
Latin,  meaning  apart,  as  in  di-gress. 

2.  Basil,  as  a  proper  name  and  as  the  name  of  a 
plant,  is  from  ^aaiXev^.  BasiUsk,  a  kind  of  serpent, 
is  from  ^aatXiaKo^  little  king,  the  diminutive  of 
fiaoriXev^,  so  called  because  something  on  its  head 
slightly  resembles  a  crown.  (Compare  asterisk, 
68,  2.)  A  basilica  (/Sao-LXiKT])  was  originally  the 
building  in  which  a  judicial  officer  at  Athens, 
called  ^a(TL\ev<;,  held  court.  This  style  of  building, 
imitated  and  somewhat  changed  at  Rome,  became 
the  prototype  of  the  early  Christian  churches,  and 
churches  of  this  form  are  still  called  basilicas. 

3.  Genetic  is  the  adjective  corresponding  to  gen- 
esis. Palin-genesis  (iraXtv  and  r^eveac^ ;  see  31,  6) 
is  againrlirth,  re-generation. 


d6] 


CONSONANT  DECLENSION. 


91 


4.  The  tri-glyph  (rpeU  and  yXvcfxo)  is  a  kind  of 
architectural  ornament. 

5.  Djrnamic  (hvvafUKo^)  is  the  adjective  from 
SvpufiL^.  Dynamo  is  a  common  contraction  for 
dynamo-electric  (jfKeKTpov  amber,  in  which  electricity 
was  first  observed)  machine,  so  called  because  in 
it  electricity  is  generated  by  force  from  a  steam- 
engine. 

6.  Hieratic  (^lepdriKo^)  is  the  adjective  from 
i€p€v<;.  Hiero-gljrphics  were  the  sacred  writing,  or 
picture-characters,  which  were  used  by  the  Egyp- 
tian priests,  and  which  have  come  down  to  us 
carved  on  stone.  A  hiero-phant  ((paLPco)  is  one 
who  shows  {make  plain,  interprets}  the  sacred 
things.  Hier-onymus  (ovvfjia)  means  having  a  sacred 
name  ;  Jerome  is  a  corruption  of  the  same. 

7.  Para-lysis  (jTrapd-XvaL^)  is  a  loosing  aside,  or 
disabling,  the  name  of  a  disease  which  disables 
the  nerves.  Paralytic  (irapaXyrLKo^)  is  the  corre- 
sponding adjective,  as  analytic  is  the  adjective  cor- 
responding to  ana-lysis.  Palsy  is  a  corruption  of 
paralysis,  intermediate  forms  being  parlesy,  palesy. 

8.  A  necro-logy  is  an  account  of  the  dead. 

9.  N eo-logy  or  neo-logism  (i/eo?)  is  the  use  of  new 
words.  A  neo-phyte  is  one  newly  planted  (yeo- 
(f>vrov)  ;  that  is,  a  new  convert,  or  a  new  member 
of  a  religious  society.  Also  from  z/eo?  we  obtain  the 
prefix  neo-  meaning  new,  used  with  a  considerable 
number  of  words,  as  neo-platonism  (TlXdr cop  Plato). 

10.  Miso-gamist  is  from  /iZo-o?  and  ydfjLOf;;  miso- 
gjmist  from  /aao-o?  and  yvvrj,  yvvacfc-o^;  woman. 


92 


THE  GBJEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[96- 


97]  Mt-VEUBS:  Tidrjfit  AND  AiScofic. 


93 


11.  IloXt^  has  been  put  at  the  end  of  several 
modern  names  of  cities,  such  as  Indiana-]fo]is,  Anna- 
polls,  in  imitation  of  ancient  Nea-polis  (literally  new 
town),  and  others.  In  Constantino-pie  (Kayvaravrl' 
vov'7roXL<;  Constantine' s  town)  and  in  some  others, 
the  last  element  has  been  shortened.  A  Greek 
metr-o-polis  was  the  mother  city  (^fJLTjrrjp  mother,  Latin 
mater)  which  sent  out  colonies,  and  to  which  these 
colonies  looked  back  as  to  a  common  centre.  The 
adjective  is  metro-politan  (iroXtrTjs). 

12.  Tactics  and  tactic  {rafcriKo^  from  rdcraco) 
have  reference  to  the  arrangement  of  military  or 
naval  forces.  Syntax  Qavv  and  rd^t^;)  is  the  arrang- 
ing together  of  words  in  sentences ;  syn-tactic  is  the 

adjective. 

13.  From  (fyvai^  are  derived  a  number  of  words 
w^hich  show  quite  a  variety  of  meaning.  Thus 
physi-cal  signifies  pertaining  to  nature ;  physi-o-logy 
is  the  science  of  nature,  but  in  use  the  word  is  re- 
stricted to  one  phase  of  the  nature  of  the  human 
body ;  physi-o-gnomy  (jycyvcoafcco)  is  the  art  of  dis- 
cerning  the  nature  of  a  person  from  his  face,  and 
then  the  word  comes  to  mean  the  face  itself. 
Again,  physics  is  the  science  of  nature,  having  about 
the  force  which  we  should  expect  physiology  to 
have  from  its  etymology.  Physic  has  received  the 
special  meaning  of  the  art  of  healing  diseases 
(whence  physician) ;  then  the  word  was  employed 
in  the  sense  of  medicine,  and  finally  for  that  par- 
ticular kind  of  medicine  with  which,  in  old  times, 
people  were  most  familiar.     In  meta-physics  fierd 


signifies  after  (a  common  use  of  fierd  with  the 
accusative),  since  meta-physics  was  considered  as 
coming  after  physics  in  the  order  of  studies.  It 
includes  the  study  of  the  phenomena  of  mind,  psy- 
chology (see  51,  8). 

14.  An  epi-phyte  (eV/,  ^vtSv)  is  a  plant  growing 
on  another,  without  receiving  from  it  any  nourish- 
ment. 

XVII.   M^-Verbs:  TcdTjfic  and  AcBcofiu 

97.  A  few  verbs,  some  of  them  common  ones, 
are  conjugated  in  a  slightly  different  manner  from 
the  verbs  thus  far  given  (with  the  exception  of 
SvvafiaL).  This  form  of  conjugation  is  called  the 
fit'iorm,  from  the  last  syllable  of  the  present  in- 
dicative active  first  singular.  TlOtj/jli  put  and  8l- 
BcofjLL  give  are  examples. 


Active. 


Sing. 


1       TL'drj'/JLL 

3     TL'6r)'at 


Dual  2 
3 


\ 


Plu, 


1 

2 
3 


TL'Oe-TOV 
TL'Oe-TOV 

TL'0€'/JL€V 

TL'Oe-aaL 


Inf. 


TL 


'Bk' 


vai 


Passive  (^Middle). 

Tt'de-fiat 
TL-de-aai 
ri-de-raL 

Tt'Oe'crOov 
ri-Oe-aOov 

Ti'di-fieOa 
Tt'Oe-vraL 


1 


d4 


THE  GREJEK  IN  ENGLtSM. 


[M- 


Sing. 

1 
2 
3 

Active. 

Bl-BcO'/JLt 
Bl'BcO'S 

Bi'Sco-at 

Passive  (Middle), 

Bi-Bo-fxat 
Bi-Bo-aai 
Bi-Bo-rai 

Dual 

2 
3 

Bl'So'TOV 

Bi-Bo-Tov 

Bi-Bo-aOov 
Bi'Bo-aOov 

Plu. 

1 
2 
3 

SL'Bo-fJL€V 
Bl-B0'T€ 

Bt-Bo-dat 

Bi'Bo-fieOa 

Bi-Bo-ade 

Bi'Bo'VTat 

Inf. 

Bi-Bo'vai 

Bi-Bo-aOat 

a.  The  root  of  TtOrjfjLu  is  ^e-,  that  of  BiBcofxc  is  So-; 
the  syllables  re-  in  TL-drj-fjiL  and  Bt-  in  Bt-Bco-fjic^  called 
the  reduplication^  do  not  appear  in  derivatives. 
(Compare  yi-yvco-a/cco.^  The  root-syllables  &€-  and 
Bo-  are  lengthened  to  07)-  and  Bco-  in  the  singular 
active. 

98.    Vocabulary. 


TO  dvdo<;,  -€09 

TO  Bepjjba,  'T0<; 

BlBco/jll 

Bpdco 

TO  Bpdfia,  'T0<; 

TO  rjOo'^y  '€0<; 

/€€V6^,  -?7,  -01/ 

TO  Kepa^y  K€pdTO<; 

6  fldvTL^i  -eft)9 
TO  fJLeXo^,  '60^ 


flower  (anther). 

shirty  hide  (derm). 

give  (dose). 

c?o,  accomplish. 

(1)  deed^  (2)  drama. 

character  (eth-ics). 

empty  (ceno-taph). 

horn  (rhino-ceros). 

soothsay er.,  prophet  (necro-mancy). 

song^  strain  of  music  (mel-ody). 

memory  (mnem-onic). 


99] 


Ml'VEBBS:  TlOrjfjLL  AND  AlBcofjic. 


95 


t      (2  »-       '       1 

?)  pt9>  pcvc^  ^ 

6  TCL^O^,  -OV 
TL07}fJLL 

rj  OecTL^y  -eco^ 
o-vv-tlOtj/jlc 

rj  avv-Oeac^y  -ect)9 


nose  (rhin-o-ceros). 

grave^  tomb  (ceno-taph). 

put^  place. 

position^  putting  (thesis). 

put  together. 

a  putting   together^   composition 


(syn-thesis). 
TO  <\>dpiiaK0Vy  'OV   drug  (pharmacy). 


99.  Exercises. 
I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  To  depfiov  Tov  rjXiov  (f)V€i  tol  dvOea.  2.  iirl 
Tw  Td<f>(p  (epi-taph)  tov  fiavTeco^  yXvipofiev  tcl  ypdfi- 
jiaTa  TOV  ovvjJiaTO^.  3.  97  fUfcpa  iral^  Tacraei  avuea 
iirl  T<^  Kev(p  Td(f)(p  (ceno-taph).  4.  6  fiaatkev^  Bv- 
vaTai  BpdeLV  iroWd  ical  dyaOd  BpafiaTU.  5.  eVl  Tft) 
dfcpo)  T^9  plvo^  K€pa^  (rhin-o-iceros)  eVr/.  6.  \rf\ 
(bvac^  BlBcoaLv  dvOpoDTroi^  iroWd  (f)ap/JiaKay  a  o 
0-0^09  (f>ap/jLaK€v<;  (pharmacist,  druggist)  avvTL07ja-L. 
7.  T069  €pyoL(;  Kal  Bpafjuaac  tov  iracBo^i  jcyvcoo-KOfjuev 
TO  ^^09.  8.  77  avv0€(ri<;  ov^  o/JLOid  ia-Ti  ttj  dvaXvcrei. 
9.  6  vavT7]<^  TL07)aLP  vBoyp  ev  roi  K€V(p  BepfiaTi  %^/^at- 
pa9.  10.  ol  vTroKpLTal  (fyaLVOVTac  ex^LV  ev  ttj  fiV)]/jL7) 
TToWd  fieXea.  11.  ol  lepee^  TiOedat  %puo"oi/  viro 
XL0(p  ev  ycovia  tov  olkov,  12.  dya0d  fiova  Xeyo/xev 
irepl  T(ov  veKpwv.  13.  avvrWepLev  poBa  fcal  aXXa 
dv0ea.  14.  ft)  fiaacXev,  ov  Bvvaaac  ^iov  toU  veKpoh 
BtBovai. 


c* 


1  Accusative  piva 


96 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 


[100— 


1.  The  soothsayer  sells  drugs  [which  are]  like 
dead  flowers.  2.  The  sun  gives  to  the  skin  of 
the  sailor's  nose  the  color  of  a  rose.  3.  A  good 
character  is  shown  by  good  deeds.  4.  The  best 
actors  have  a  good  memory.  5.  The  king  who 
makes  (riOrj^ii)  the  laws  of  the  people  cannot 
make  QiroLeo))  the  songs.  6.  Nature  gives  horns 
to  the  she-goat  and  a  thick  (iraxy)  hide  (pachy- 
derm) to  the  hippopotamus.  7.  The  first  flowers 
of  the  season  are  put  upon  the  graves  of  the  dead. 
8.  Can  you  tell  the  position  of  the  cities  which 
are  sending  their  citizens  to  w^ar  ?  9.  The  peda- 
gogue is  writing  a  book  about  the  composition  of 
words.  10.  The  priest  is  examining  the  origin  of 
the  sacred  songs.  11.  Young  orators  are  able  to 
put  together  many  words  which  have  little  force. 

12.  The   gods   appear   to   the    soothsayer   alone. 

13.  A  beautiful  deed  is  like  a  light  which  can  be 
seen  afar. 

100.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Anth-o-logy  is  properly  a  collection  of  flowers  ; 
for  the  primary  meaning  of  Xeyw,  from  which 
the  last  part  is  derived,  is  gather.  (^Ek'\€ktck6<; 
eclectic,  from  i^  and  Xeyco,  shows  the  same  force 
of  the  verb.)  But  anth-ology  is  generally  used  in 
a  figurative  sense,  to  denote  a  collection  of  choice 
passages  from  authors,  especially  from  poets.  Heli- 
anthus  (77X^09)  is  the  scientific  name  for  sun-flower. 


100]  Mt-VERBS:  TidrjfjLC  AND  AiScofjic. 


9T 


2.  Epi-dermis  (tV/  and  Sep/ia),  the  scientific 
word  for  the  outer  skin,  has  come  into  common 
use.  Hypo-dermis,  the  under  skin  (utto),  is  mostly 
confined  to  scientific  writing  and  speech,  although 
the  adjective  hypo-derinic  has  become  common  from 
the  practice  of  giving  certain  remedies  by  injec- 
tion under  the  skin.  The  element  hjrpo-  is  used  in 
many  scientific  terms  in  the  opposite  sense  to  that 
of  hjrper-  (see  46,  6,  and  note  that  the  related  Latin 
prefix  sub-  is  in  like  manner  contrasted  with 
super-).  The  adjective  pachy-dermatous  (ttuxv 
thick)  preserves  the  -ar-  of  Sepfiar-.  Taxi-dermy  is 
the  art  of  preparing  skins  so  as  to  preserve  their 
natural  appearance. 

3.  Dose  is  our  remnant  of  Secrecy  -ew?  a  giving, 
from  SiSco/jLi.  Anti-dote  {avri-Sorop)  is  a  medicine 
given  against  —  that  is,  to  counteract  some  effect. 
An-ec-dote  is  from  uv-iK-SoTov.  The  plural  dv-CK- 
Sara  (literally  things  not  given  out  or  published) 
was  the  name  'given  by  Procopius  [a  Byzantine 
writer  of  the  sixth  century  A.D.]  to  the  unpub- 
lished memoirs  of  the  emperor  Justinian,  which 
consisted  chiefly  of  tales  of  the  private  life  of  the 
court;  whence  the  application  of  the  name  to 
short  stories  or  particulars.^ 

4.  A  drastic  (^paariKo^;  from  Spdco)  remedy  is 
an  active,  vigorous  one.  The  r  of  the  stem  Spdfiar- 
appears  in  dramatic,  dramatist,  and  in  dramat-urgy 
(^SpfTfiarovpytd  for  Sprlpar-c-epyid,  the  second  part 
being  from  epyov)  drama-making,  or  the  art  of 
writing  and  representing  plays. 


98 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[100— 


5.  An  earlier  meaning  of  97^09  is  custom^  habit; 
hence,  that  body  of  habits  and  usages  which  make 
up  character  or  morals.  (In  the  same  way  Latin 
mos^  moris^  custom.,  has  given  us  moral.}  From 
77^09  in  the  latter  sense  we  have  ethic,  ethical,  per- 
taining  to  morals,  and  ethics,  the  science  of  morals. 

6.  Besides  rhin-o-ceros  (plv-o-Kepoy^;  nose-horn) 
fC€pco<;  gives  us  also  mono-ceros  (fiovo-Kepco^)  unicorn 
(Latin  unus,  one,  and  cornu,  horn). 

1.  From  fjLdvTc<;  we  have  the  adjective  mantle 
(fiavrtKo^),  and  also  the  element  -mancy  (/jLavreta), 
divination,  in  cMr-o-mancy,  divination  by  examin- 
ing the  hand  (x^ip)-,  necro-mancy,  divination  by 
consulting  the  dead  (yeKpo^),  pyr-o -mancy,  by  in- 
terpreting the  appearance  of  a  fire  (jrvp),  and 
biblio-mancy,  by  selecting  hap-hazard  a  passage  of 
the  Bible  (^i/SXlov).  The  corresponding  adjec- 
tives are  necro-mantic,  etc. 

8.  MeXo?  (which  refers  to  the  music,  while  m8/] 
refers  more  to  the  words  of  a  song)  appears  in 
melody  (see  31,  7)  and  in  mel-o-drama,  song-play,  or 
play  interspersed  with  music. 

9.  From  fjivtjfir)  is  derive.d  the  adjective  fivrjfKop 
mindful,  which  gives  our  word  mnemonic,  pertain- 
ing to  memory,  and  mnemonics,  a  system  of  artificial 
aids  to  memory.  A-mnesty  (^a-fjuvrjareid,  alpha  priva- 
tive ;  see  60,  3,  b)  is  a  legal  lack  of  memory,  that 
is,  a  general  pardon  for  past  offences  in  time  of 

war. 

10.  a.  The  root  Be-  is  the  central  element  of  a 
number  of  important  derivatives.     Thesis  has  the 


100]  Mc-VEBBS:  TiOrjfjbc  AND  AiSco/MC. 


99 


;><l 


figurative  meaning  of  a  position  taken  and  main- 
tained in  argument  (Note  the  derivation  of  posi- 
tion from  Latin  positio,  from  pono,  to  place.)  Anti- 
thesis (^avri)  is  op-position,  contrast;  par-en-thesis 
(irapd,  ev)  is  literally  a  putting  in  beside,  then 
something  put  in  beside,  as  a  side  or  subordinate 
matter;  hypo-thesis  (l/tto)  is  under-putting,  a  sup- 
position (Latin  sub,  under)  ;  syn-thesis,  putting 
together,  is  often  contrasted  with  ana-lysis,  taking 
apart.  The  corresponding  adjectives  are  anti-thetic 
(avTL-OeTLKo^),  par-en-thetic,  etc.,  to  each  of  which 
-al  is  often  added.  Further,  epi-thet  (iTrl-derop)  is 
a  descriptive  word  put  on  (figuratively)  to  a  person 
or  thing. 

b.  Again,  6t]Kr)  is  a  case  or  chest  in  which  to  put 
things ;  an  apo-thecary  (aTro)  was  originally  so 
called  because  he  has  his  drugs  put  away  in  cases; 
biblio-theke  Q^l^lov),  book-case,  is  an  old  word  for 
library.  Hypo-thecate  is  a  legal  term  which  goes 
back  to  the  elements  vtto  and  O/jKrj.  Hence  re- 
hypothecate. 

c.  A  theme  (^e/ia,  -T09)  is  primarily  a  subject 
laid  doivn,  or  proposed  for  discussion ;  from  this 
are  derived  the  other  uses  of  the  word.  The  adjec- 
tive thematic  retains  the  -ar-  of  the  stem.  Finally, 
dvddefia,  -T09  (am  here  meaning  up)  was  originally 
anything  put  up  in  a  temple,  that  is,  offered  or 
devoted  to  a  god.  Later,  however,  the  form  dvd- 
6rjfia  was  used  in  this  sense,  and  avd-deiia  meant 
only  what  was  devoted  to  an  evil  power.  Hence 
ana-themat-ize  (ava-detiarlt^co)  signifies  to  devote  to 


100 


THE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[101— 


evil^  to  curse  solemnly ;  and  ana-thema  is  not  only 
the  person  thus  cursed,  but  also  the  curse  itself^ 
which  was  formerly  a  solemn  ceremony  of  the 
church. 

11.  Pharmaco-poeia  (^apixaKo-^oita)  signifies  a 
book  describing  drug-making^  or  the  preparation  of 
medicines. 


XVIII.    Mfc-VEKBS :  '^lo-TTjfJLt  AND  Kepdvvvfit. 

101.  The  root  of  larijfjLi  set  up^  cause  to  standi  is 
(7Ta-,  the  same  root  which  appears  in  Latin  sta-re 
and  English  stand.  The  present  indicative  and 
infinitive  are  as  follows : 


Sing.  1 
2 


Dual 


Plu. 


3 

'2 
3 

1 
2 
3 


Inf. 


Active. 

Passive  {Middle) 

L-arrj-fit 

L-ara-fMaL 

L-(TTr)-<; 

X-ara'CTai 

L-(rT7]-ac 

L-a-ra-rac 

L-aTa-TOV 

X-ara-adov 

I'O'Ta'TOV 

L-ara-aOov 

L-ara-fiev 

i-ard-fieda 

X'(TTa'T€ 

L-ara-aOe 

(jL-ard'CicrC) 

L-o-ra-vraL 

L-a-raa-L 

l-ard-vac 

L-ara-aOac 

a.  The  syllable  /-  (originally  g-l-)  is  a  reduplica- 
tion, like  TL'  in  TiOrjfjiL.  (Latin  sisto  corresponds, 
in  formation  and  meaning,  to  Ito-rrjfiL.')  The  mean- 
ing stand  is  given  to  certain  other  teiises  of  the 


103]        Ml-VEBBS  : ''laTTj/jLC  AND  Kepdvvvfic.      101 

verb,  which  we  shall  not  use  here,  and  most  of  the 
derivatives  show  this  meaning. 

102.  The  root  of  Kepapvu/juc  mix  is  fcepa-,  which  is 
shortened  to  /cpa-,  in  derivatives.  The  syllable 
'wv-y  -vvv-^  is  a  suffix  used  to  form  the  stem  of  the 
present  tense. 


Active, 

Passive  {Middle) 

Sing.  1 
2 
3 

Kepd'VVl-jJLL 
K€pd-PVV-<i 

Kepd-vvv-at 

K€pd'VPV-fJLaL 

Kepd-vvv-aat 
Kepd'VVv-aOov 

Dual  2 

Kepd-vvV'TOV 

Kepd-vvv-aOov 

3 

Kepa-vvV'TOv 

Kepd-vvv-aOov 

Plu.  1 
2 
3 

Kepd-vvD-jxev 

Kepd-vvv-re 

Kepa-vvV'daL 

.   Kepa-vvihfjLeOa 
Kepd-vvv-aOe 
Kepd-vvv-vrai 

Inf. 

Kepa-vvv-vaL 

Kepd-vvv-aOai, 

alpeeo 


103.    Vocabulary. 


alpiofiat  (middle) 
alperiKO^f  -rj,  -ov 
Bc-acpio)  (fr.  Sea  and 

alpe(o^ 
Sca-XiyofjiaLy  dep.. 


)V(T- 


TO  ^^OP,  'QV 


seize^  grasp. 

choose. 

able  to  choose  (heretic). 

divide  (di-eresis). 

converse  (dia-lect). 

in  compounds  only,  with  the 
force  of  hard  or  bad;  op- 
posed to  €v  (dys-pepsia), 

animal  (zofi-logy), 


102 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[104— 


XarrjpLL 

one's  own^  private  (idiom). 
set  up^  cause  to  stand  (stat-ic) 

KepavwfiL 
6  Kpdrrip,  • 

TreiTTco 
irXdaaoy 

T€flV(0 

(f>pd^co 

-rjpo^ 

mix, 

mixing-howl  (crater). 

even^  level  (an-omalous). 

digest  (dys-pep-sia). 

form^  mould  (plas-tic). 

cut  (tome). 

make  known^  tell  (phrase). 

104.  Exercises. 

I.  Translate  into  English. 

1.  'O  plvoK€p(o<;  (see  100,  6)  Bvvarac  aipiecv  rh 
dWa  ^<pa  Kol  nOevat  ev  rcS  Trora/jiS,  2.  o  i€p€v<: 
LO'TTjo'L  Kevov  fcpaTTjpa  VTTO  To3  BivSpo),  3.  Btacp€0/JL€P 
ra  (f>dpfjLaKa.  4.  eVt  ry  ofiaXy  yfj  icrrafiev  otfcov^. 
6.  o  iral^  KepdvvvaL  yrjv  Kal  vScop  fcal  irKdaa-eL  KaXas 
eiKova^  tS>v  ^wcov.  6.  6  filKp6<;  TecopyLo^;  (see  57,  4) 
T€fMV€L  TO  BivSpov^  oXXd  (but^  OV  Bvvarai  yjrevBo^ 
\ij6LV,  7.  Bvvaaai  (})pd^€tv  rd  ovv/nara  tS>v  dvdecov 
a  dva\vei<;  ;  8.  dvOpcoiroL  ev  ireirrovaL  (en-peptic) 
Tr)v  adpKa  ^(^cov  /cat  (fyvrd,  9.  o  /cpvaTaWo^  iv  to3 
lBi(d  irapaBeL(T(p  rov  y8ao"fc\eft)9  6fJLa\6<;  eari.  10.  oi 
6eo\  Bvvavrac  TrXdaaeiv  iroWd  yevea  l^axov.  11.  ol 
diroo'ToXoi  BiaXeyovrai  avv  rol^  iroXiTaL<;  irepX  rov 
iroXe/jLOV.  12.  alpeo/MeOa  dyadov  riOo^  dvrl  rrj^  ^aai- 
Xico^  Bwdfieco^.  13.  rl  Kepdvvvrai  iv  rcS  fcpdrfjpi ; 
14.  ol  6eoX  BcBodac  iroXXd  Tot9  iratal  tS>v  dv- 
0p(O7r(ov. 


106]        ML-VEllBS:''lo'Tr)p.t  AND  KepdwOfic.      103 

II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  The  solitary  dynast  converses  with  the  priest, 
and  makes-known  his  private  feelings  (idio-pathic). 
2.  The  young  [man]  cannot  mould  an  image  of  a 
hippopotamus.  3.  The  poets  make-known  the 
character  and  deeds  of  the  ancients.  4.  They 
mix  drugs  in  a  little  mixing-bowl.  5.  The  animal 
is  able  to  eat  and  digest  many  kinds  of  plants. 
6.  They  are  setting  up  a  new  machine,  which  cuts 
grass.  7.  It  is  best  to  choose  the  level  road. 
8.  In  time  we  learn  to  choose  the  good  instead  of 
the  bad.  9.  The  sailor's  brother  seizes  and  throws 
the  measuring-rod.  10.  The  leaders  of  the  people 
wish  to  divide  the  city.  11.  To  converse  with 
others  is  not  given  to  many  animals.  12.  A  level 
road  leads  to  the  river.  13.  He  chooses  the  best 
place  in  the  theatre,  from  which  he  can  see  the 
drama  well. 


105.  Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Di-eresis  or  di-aeresis  (BL-aipeai^;,  -e©?),  liter- 
ally a  taking  apart^  shows  the  active  signification 
of  alpeco.  From  alpeco  in  its  middle  sense  we  have 
heresy  (^atpeai^,  -ew?),  a  choosing^  and  heretic.  Tlie 
term  heretic  was  originally  given  to  people  who  did 
not  accept  the  doctrines  of  the  church,  but  chose 
their  own  beliefs;  and  heresy  was  a  belief  thus 
chosen. 

2.  From  Bca-Xeyofiat  (Bid  and  Xeyco,  in  which  the 
force  of  Bid  is  not  clear)  we  obtain  dia-lect  (17  Bid- 


104 


THl:  GRJE^K  IN  ENGLISH. 


[105- 


X6/CT09,  -ov  conversation^  way  of  talking')^  and  dia- 
logue (Sm-Xo709).  Dia-lectics  was  first  used  of  a 
conversational  form  of  argument  and  investigation. 

3.  A  zo5-phyte  (fo3oi/,  c^vrov^  is  an  animal-plant ; 
that  is,  an  animal  very  much  like  a  plant.  An  epi- 
zootic disease  is  one  which  prevails  among  animals 
(eirl  TOL<;  ^(ool^^  as  an  epi-demic  (see  74,  1)  among 
human  beings.  The  zodiac  (fcoSia/to?,  an  adjective 
formed  from  ^mBiov,  the  diminutive  of  fcGoi/),  that 
imaginary  belt  of  the  sky  through  which  the  sun 
seems  to  move,  contains  the  twelve  constellations, 
which  are  fancied  to  resemble  various  animals. 

4.  Idiom  {ISicofia,  -ro^;')  denotes,  first  one's  own 
peculiar  use  of  language ;  then  a  mode  of  expres- 
sion which  is  peculiar  to  a  particular  language. 
Idiomatic  retains  -ar-  of  the  stem.  Idiot  (lhL(i>Tr]<;, 
-ov)  was  formerly  used  in  the  Greek  sense  of  a 
private  person^  as  distinguished  from  one  in  public 
station.  Then  it  came  to  mean  a  common^  unedu- 
cated^ or  simple  person,  and  finally  one  who  has 
not  the  ordinary  degree  of  intelligence. 

5.  From  the  root  of  larrj/jLc  we  have  static  (^ara- 
TLKo^^  and  statics.  A  compound  of  statics  is  hydr-o- 
statics  (yhcop)^  the  science  which  has  to  do  with  the 
laws  of  pressure  and  equilibrium  of  water  and  sim- 
ilar liquids.  An  apo-state  (aTro-o-rarTy?)  is  one  who 
stands  offfrom^  or  deserts^  his  former  faith  or  party. 
Apo-stasy  (^aTro-araaL^i)  is  the  act  of  so  deserting. 
Ec-stasy  (eK-araa-Ls:^^  a  standing  out^  is  an  extreme 
state  of  emotion,  in  which,  as  we  say,  one  is  "  be- 
side himself " ;  ec-static  is  the  adjective.     Sy-stem 


I 


105]        ML-VEItB8:''\aTr]tii  AND  KepdvviJfiL.      105 

(a-varr^fiay  -T09,  from  avv  and  larrj/jbi^  denotes  the 
standing  together  of  things,  in  an  orderly  manner; 
systematic  is  the  adjective,  and  systematize  the  verb. 
(Many  English  words  containing  the  root  sta  are 
from  Latin.) 

6.  The  Greek  Kparrjp  was  a  large  bowl  in  which 
the  wine  was  mixed  with  water  before  being  drunk ; 
the  crater  of  a  volcano  is  so  named  from  its  resem- 
blance in  shape.  From  Ihio^y  avv^  and  tcpacn<;  mix- 
ture was  formed  Ihio-crvy'Kpdaid  idio-syn-crasy,  one's 
own  peculiar  mixture  of  qualities;  idio-crasy  is 
rarely  used  in  the  same  sense. 

7.  From  ofjLaXo^  and  dv-  privative  (see  60,  3,  J), 
we  have  an-omalons  (^dv-cofjLa\o<;  with  an  irregular 
lengthening  of  0  to  w),  irregular^  and  ano-maly 
(aV'toixaXia)^  irregularity, 

8.  Eu-peptic  and  eu-pepsia  are  contrasted  with 
dys-peptic,  (hvcr-  and  TreTrrco^  digesting  ill^  and  dys- 
pepsia, bad  digestion. 

9.  From  TrXdaaco  we  obtain  plaster  (e/£-7rXa<r- 
rpov)^  and  also  plastic  (irXaariKo^^^  moulding^  or 
capable  of  being  moulded^  or  pertaining  to  moulding 
or  fashioning. 

10.  The  root  of  rifjivco  is  re/i,-,  which  appears  in 
English  derivatives  in  the  form  Tofi-^  with  the 
common  change  of  e  to  o.  A  tome  (jofio^y  -ov)  is 
a  part  of  a  work  cut  from  the  rest,  hence  a  volume. 
An  a-tom  (^d-rofio^,  alpha  privative)  is  a  particle  so 
small  that  it  cannot  be  cut  in  two^  an  indivisible  par- 
ticle. Ana-tomy  is  primarily  the  cutting  up  (ava- 
TOfir))^  dissection  of  a  body ;  then  it  came  to  mean 


106 


TnE  GBEEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[107- 


the  structure  of  a  body,  as  learned  by  dissection. 
Zoo-tomy  is  the  anatomy  of  animals.  An  epi-tome 
(eiri-TOfirf)  is  a  brief  summary  of  a  book,  the  result 
of  cutting  out  all  but  the  principal  statements. 
The  Greek  word  for  insect  (Latin  in  and  seco^ 
cut')  is  ev-TOfjLov^  because  so  manj'  insects,  like  the 
wasp  and  spider,  are  cut  into  so  as  to  be  almost 
divided.     Hence  the  first  element  of  entomo-logfy. 

11.  Phrase  is  our  form  of  <^pao"^9  speaking^  from 
(f>pd^(o.  Compounds  are  phrase-o-logy,  para-phrase 
(irapa)^  and  peri-phrasis  (irepi)^  with  the  adjective 
peri-phrastic.  (Compare  circum-locution  from  Latin 
circum  and  loquor.) 

XIX.    The  Verb  ^rffjui;   the  Adjective  ITa?. 

106.  The  conjugation  of  cfyrjfjLL  say^  affirm^  is  nearly 
like  that  of  tarrffit  in  the  present  active ;  but  the 
present  indicative  of  (f>r)fii  is  enclitic  (see  55),  ex- 
cept in  the  second  person  singular,  (^779 ;  hence  it 
follows  the  rules  in  55,  a  and  5,  in  regard  to  ac- 
cent, and  should  not  be  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
a  sentence. 


Sing, 

Dual. 

Plu, 

1 

cl>7J-flL 

(})a-fi€V 

2 

<l>v^ 

^a-Tov 

<f>a'Te 

0 
0 

« 

^a-Tov 

Inf. 
^orvau 

(j>do'l 

107. 

The  adjective 

ira<;   all 

(sometimes,  in 

the 

singular,  every)  is  of  the  third  declension  in 

the 

108]     THE  VEEB  (fyrjfii  ;   THE  ABJECTIVE  ira^.    107 

masculine  and  neuter,  and  of  the  first  declension 
in  the  feminine.  It  has  some  irregularities  of  ac- 
cent, and  is  therefore  given  in  full. 


Sing. 

N. 

7ra9 

iraaa 

Trap 

G. 

iravro^ 

TTOO-Tj^ 

iraPTO^ 

D. 

iravri 

iraarj 

iraprC 

A. 

iravra 

iracrav 

Trap 

V. 

Trap 

iraaa 

• 

Trap 

Dual 

N.A.V. 

irdvre 

iraaa 

irdpre 

G.D. 

irdvTOLV 

iraaatv 

irdpTOLP 

Plu. 

N.V. 

7rdvT€<; 

iraaaL 

irdpra 

G. 

irdvTCdv 

TraaSiV 

TrdpTcop 

D. 

iraaL 

iraaai^ 

iracTL 

A. 

irdvra^; 

iraaas 

irdpra 

108. 

r]  dyopa,  -a? 

TO  dXyo<;,  -eo? 

TO  ^dpo^y  -609 

hihdaicoi) 

BoK€t  (3rd  sing,  of 

TO  Boyfia,  -T09 
fcaco  (root  /cav-) 

KaVCTTLKO^,  '7],  -OP 
/CpVTTTCO 

Xa/jL/3dp(o  (root  \ayS-) 
fiapffdpco  (root  /naO-) 


Vocabulary. 

assembly  (phantasm-agor-ia). 
pain  (neur-alg-ia). 
weight  (baro-meter). 
teach  (didac-tic). 

it  seems^  seems  true. 

opinion  (what  seems  true  : 

dogma). 
burn.  / 

burning^  caustic. 
conceal  (crjrpt). 
take  (syl-lab-le). 
learn  (philo-math). 


108 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH, 


[109— 


TO  fidOrjfxa,  -T09 

flVOD 

TO  /JLvaT/jpiov,  -ov 
IxvaTLKO^,  -rj,  'OV 
o\o<;,  -77,  'OV 
7rd^,  Trdcra,  irdv 
7)  irelpay  -a? 
0  7r€LpdT7](;,  -ov 
TTpaaaco 
TO  irpdyfiay  'To<; 


lesson  (mathematics). 

shut  the  eyes. 

secret  doctrine^  mystery. 

secret^  mystic. 

whole  (holo-caust). 

all^  every  (pan-orama). 

attempt^  trial  (em-pir-ic). 

pirate. 

accomplish  (prac-tical). 

deed^  affair  (pragmat-ic). 

split  (schism). 

say^  affirm  (eu-phe-mism). 

109.   Exercises. 


I.   Translate  into  English. 

1.  T/  ^7)9  TO  Tov  ^(pov  ^dpo<;  elvau  ^  (to  he^  ; 
2.  iv  Trj  dyopa  tcov  ttoXItcov  ol  prjTOpe^;  p.av6dvovcn 
Xeyeiv  tc5  h/jfiw.  3.  hvvaTai  6  TrpeafivTepo^;  ScSd- 
(TKeLv  irdvTa  Ta  fivaTrjpLa  tcov  Oewv ;  4.  T049  ev 
Tfi  a)^o\f}  fjLaOrjiJLaaL  ifKao-aovTai  ol  iralhe^.  5.  rj 
pLvarTLKY]  (TO(f>id  TCOV  dp')(aicov  ovK  €TC  (longer^  Kpv- 
iTTeTat.  6.  ol  TToXiTai  (ppd^ovcrc  Ta  SoypuaTa  t^9 
dyopd<;.  7.  r/  irelpa  BcBdo-Kec  tl  SvvdpieOa  irpaaaeiv. 
8.  ol  TretpdTal  dirO'TepLVovcn  (Jltto-  =  off^  tcl^  Ket^a- 
Xa9  irdvTcov  tcov  ^tpcov  a  XapL^dvovai.  9.  ov  8v- 
vaaOe  a^i^eLV  to  SevSpov.  10.  irdvTe^  ol  iralhe<; 
pLavOdvovai  to  oXov  fidOrj/jLa.  11.  to  KavcrTiKov 
0€pjJLpv  TOV  r/Xlov  BiB(0(7Lv  oXyea.     12.   0  prJTCop  (fyrjal 


1  The  verb  <f>rjfiL,  like  verbs  of  saying  in  Latin,  takes  the  in- 
finitive, with  or  without  a  subject-accusative,  as  its  object. 


110]    THE  VEItn  f^rjp.l;   THE  ADJECTIVE  7ra9.   109 

TOV  hrjpLOV  elvac  ao(f>ov  Kal  dyaOov.  13.  TretpaovTat 
Koeuv  Ta  BevSpa.  14.  0  ^Xt09  fcdec  to  Bepp^a  tov  veov 
dOXijTov.  15.  Ta  pbvaTrjpLa,  a  ol  nrpea^vTepoL  fcpv- 
iTTeLV  ireipdovTati  irdvTa  (ppd^ovTac. 


II.  Translate  into  Greek. 

1.  They  conceal  the  nature  of  the  drugs  which 
they  give.  2.  The  fire  splits  all  the  stones  and 
burns  all  the  plants.  3.  The  whole  affair  is  secret. 
4.  Pain  teaches  many  lessons.  6.  Can  you  tell  in 
the  assembly  of  the  people  the  secret-doctrines 
which  the  priests  teach?  6.  The  pirate  takes  all 
the  gold  in  the  city.  7.  Caustic  words  give  pain. 
8.  The  king  conceals  the  attempt  of  the  sooth- 
sayers. 9.  The  air  in  the  lungs  has  not  much 
weight.  10.  We  learn  from  ancient  books  the 
opinions  of  the  ancients  about  nature.  11.  The 
wise  affirm  that  the  good  citizen  rules  (inf.)  his 
own  feelings,  and  gives  much  to  others.  12.  It  is 
best  to  learn,  not  many  [things],  but  much  about 
a  few  things.  13.  What  are  you  trying  to  accom- 
plish? 14.  The  image  which  the  citizens  are 
trying  to  set  up  is  a  work  of  much  skill. 

110.   Notes  on  Derivatives. 

1.  Phantasm-agoria  ((f>dvTaapia^  74, 11,  and  dyopa) 
denotes  an  assemblage  of  phantasms  or  iinages.  In 
pan-egyric  we  have  a  derivative  of  a  dialectic  form 
of  dyopa.  A  irav-riyvpL^  was  an  assemblage  of  all 
the  people^  as  at  the  great  Olympic  games ;  and  a 


110 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[110— 


7raiM]yvpcfco<;  X0709  was  an  oration  delivered  at 
such  an  assembly.  As  such  orations  were  often 
in  praise  of  some  city  or  person,  the  term  came  to 
mean  a  eulogy. 

2.  From  d\yo<;  is  derived  the  last  part  of  cephal- 
algia (see  31,  5)  and  neur-algia  (^rb  vevpov  nerve). 

3.  In  bary-tone  the  y  stands  for  v  of  ^apv<^  heavy ^ 
which  is  plainly  related  to  /3apo9.  The  word  is 
also  spelled  baritone.  (For  tone  see  mono-tone,  68, 
9.)  The  baro-meter  is  an  instrument  for  measuring 
the  weight  of  the  atmosphere. 

4.  Didactic  (StSa/cr^/co?,  from  StSacr/to),  the  root 
of  which  is  BtSafc-y  means  instructive. 

6.  Aoj/jLa  sometimes  has  the  same  meaning  as 
Bo^a;  but  the  English  dogma  has  taken  on  the 
sense  of  an  accepted  opinion^  or  one  which  is  put 
forth  as  unquestionably  true.  Hence  dogmatic 
and  dogmatize. 

6.  The  verb  fcaco  has  lost  the  v  which  is  shown 
by  other  forms  to  belong  to  the  root.  Cautery 
(^KavrrjpLov  a  branding-iron)  is  the  act  of  burning 
or  searing  in  surgery.     Cauterize  is  the  verb. 

7.  Apo-crypha  (aTro-z^ptx^a,  from  aTro-Kpiirrco) 
signifies  properly  hidden  away  ;  then  by  a  curious 
transfer  the  word  was  applied  to  those  books  of 
the  Bible  which  were  not  recognized  as  inspired. 

8.  Syl-lable  is  from  avX-Xa^rj  {trvv  and  \a/A- 
^ai/ft)),  what  is  tahen  together^  that  is,  pronounced 
with  one  impulse  of  the  voice.  In  di-(8)8yllable 
(for  di-  see  96,  1)  the  extra  s  was  originally  due 
to  a  blunder,  like  many  other  peculiarities  of  our 


llOJ     THE  VERB  (f>Vfii ;   THE  ADJECTIVE  7ra9.  Ill 

spelling.  Tri-syllable  has  for  its  first  element  the 
stem  of  T/oeZ?.  .  Syl-labus,  of  the  same  etymology 
with  syl-lable,  denotes  an  abstract  or  compendium. 
In  epi-lepsy  (literally,  an  attack^  seizure)^  the  root 
Xaff'  appears  in  the  slightly  different  form  \777r-. 
The  root  is  still  farther  changed  in  di-lemma  (S/- 
\7jfjLfia).  This  word  was  originally  the  technical 
name  of  a  peculiar  form  of  argument,  but  now  is 
often  used  for  a  difficult  situation^  in  which  any 
course  of  action  which  may  be  chosen  seems  likely 
to  lead  to  further  difficulty.  The  force  of  the 
word  may  be  roughly  given  as  double-catch;  for 
di-  see  96,  1. 

9.  In  mathematics  the  meaning  of  ixaOrifiaTa  has 
been  restricted  to  a  particular  branch  of  learning. 
A  philo-math  (c^tXo?)  is  one  who  i^fond  of  learning. 

10.  Holo-caust  (0X09  and  Kavaro^  from  koco)  is 
used  of  sacrifices  which  were  wholly  burned.  The 
phrase  Kaff  oXov  (for  /cara  oXov)  is  used  in  an 
adverbial  sense,  wholly  ;  from  this  was  formed  the 
adjective  KuOoXcfco^  miiversal^  general ;  hence  our 
word  catholic. 

11.  Ha?  appears  in  English  in  the  forms  pant- 
and  pan-.  Thus,  pant-o-mime  (see  78,  4),  pant-o- 
phagous  (^(f)ay€Lv)y  equivalent  to  omni-vorous^  from 
Latin.  Pandemonium  (halficov)  is  the  place  of  all 
demons  ;  pan-theon  {irav-Q^lov^  deosi),  a  temple  of  all 
gods;  pan-theism,  the  doctrine  that  the  universe^ 
taken  as  a  whole^  is  God  ;  pan-orama  (opdcci)^  a  com- 
plete view;  pan-acea  (jrav-aKeia^  from  aKeofxaL  to 
cure)^  a  cure-all;  pan-oply  (irav-oirXicii  from  oirXov 


112 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH. 


[110. 


■4 

armor),  complete  armor.  From  frequent  use  in 
these  and  similar  words,  the  syllable  pan-  has  come 
to  be  used  freely  with  a  like  meaning  in  forming 
new  compounds,  often  when  the  second  part  is 
not  Greek,  as  in  pan-evangeUcal,  T?2in-Slavism.  Dia- 
pason is  an  abbreviation  of  8c^  Trdacop  xopScop  (^ 
XopSrj  the  string  of  a  lyre,  whence  our  chord) ;  it 
means,  therefore,  the  octave,  or  the  entire  scale. 

12.  An  em-piric  is  one  whose  knowledge  or  skill 
is  gained  only  in  trial  or  experiment  (eV  ireipa), 
and  is  not  founded  on  scientific  principles.  *A 
pirate  makes  hostile  attempts  or  attacks  on  others  ; 
piracy  is  shortened  from  ireLpareia. 

13.  From  irpcKraw  we  have  practical  {irpaKriK^^), 
practice,  and  praxis  {irpa^t^^  a  technical  term 
having  one  of  the  meanings  of  practice  ;  pragmatic 
shows  the  stem  of  Trpayfia. 

14.  A  schism  {crxicrfia,  ^To^,  from  axil^co)  is  a 
"  split,''  or  division,  in  a  party  or  organization ; 
hence  schismatic. 

15.  From  €v-(f>r}fMo^  wellspeahing  Qev  and  (prjfii) 
we  have  eu-phemism,  eu-phemistic.  A  irpo-cf>^Trj^ 
IS  one  who  speaks  for  ?inot\iQv  (irpS,  like  Latin  j^ro, 
often  having  the  meaning  for} ;  pro-phet,  one  who 
speaks  for,  or  in  place  of  God;  that  is,  one  who  is 
inspired  by  God  and  declares  his  will.  Hence 
pro-phetic,  pro-phecy,  and  pro-phesy.  Hetero-phemy 
(€T€po^)  is  a  euphemistic  word,  of  recent  forma- 
tion, ioT  false-speaking. 


GREEK-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


A. 

'A-yaOo's,  -t{,  -ov  good,  66. 
d^YcXXo)  announce,  report,  68. 
ttYYcXos,  -ov,  d  messenger,  68. 
oyopd,  -ds,  TJ  assembly,  108. 
ayta  lead,  72. 
d7&>7ds,  -ov,  d  leader,   guide, 

72. 
a')fwv,  d^wvos,  o  contest,  84. 
dY(>)v££o|iiai   struggle,    engage 

in  a  contest,  84. 
d8€\(|>ds,  -ov,  d  brother,  58. 
difp,  a^pos,  d  air  84. 
a6XT)TT{$,  -ov,  d  athlete,  84. 
dOXov,  -ov,  TO  prize,  84. 
dOXos,  -ov,  d  athletic  game,  84. 
aipc'o)  seize,  grasp,  103. 
alpc'cfjiai  choose,  103. 
aUr6dvo|jiai  perceive,  76. 
oKjiT],  -Tis,  tj  summit,  prime,  29. 
dKovcD  hear,  34. 
oKpov,  -ov,  TO  top,  upper  part, 

94. 
oKpoiroXis,  -ca>s,  tj  acropolis, 

94. 
0X705,  -€os,  TO  pain,  108. 
dWd.  but. 


dXXos,  -TJ,  -o  other,  89. 

dva'yi'yvwo-Kci)  read,  49. 

di^dXvo-is,  -c<as,  tj  an  undoing, 
taking  apart,  analysis,  94. 

dvoXvca  unloose,  take  apart, 
analyze,  94. 

dvOos,  -€os,  TO  flower,  98. 

dvOpcairos,  -ov,  d  man,  49. 

dvTaY«vMrTT]s,  -ov,  d  antago- 
nist, 84. 

dvTC,  prep.  w.  gen.,  instead  of, 
66. 

dird,  prep.  w.  gen.,  from,  away 
from,  54. 

diroo'Tc'XXa)  send  away,  68. 

dirdoTToXos,  -ov,  d  envoy,  am- 
bassador, 68. 

dpiO|ic<i>  count,  76. 

dpiOfidsy  -ov,  d  number,  76. 

dpio-Tos>  -ij,  -ov  best,  89. 

opxatos,  -d,  -ov  ancient,  80. 

<ipX^'»  -^s,  Ti  (1)  beginning, 
(2)  government,  80. 

dpx«  (1)  begin,  (2)  rule,  80. 

Gurrpov,  -ov,  to  star,  66. 

avXds,  -ov,  d  pipe,  68. 

avTo's,  -T],  -d  -self;  myself, 
himself;  itself,  etc* 


114 


GBEEK-ENGLISII  VOCABULARY. 


GBEEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULABY. 


115 


B. 
Ba\X«,  throw,  44. 
Poipos,  -cos,  TO  weight,  108. 
^curiXcvSy  -cws,  d  king,  92. 
PiPXCov,  -ov,  to'  book,  66. 
PiPXioitmXtis,  -ov,  d  bookseller 

66. 
pCos,  -ov,  d  life,  49. 
Popc'ds,  -ov,  d  north-wind,  44. 
PoTavi)«  -Tjs,  tj  grass,  herb,  29. 

r. 

Fofios,  -ov,  d  marriage,  89. 

■ycvco,  -OS,  TJ  family,  89. 

7ev6o-is,  -6»S|  TJ  birth,  origin, 
genesis,  94. 

^i'vos,  -€os,  TO  race,  kind,  89. 

T1>  W*  "H  earth,  land,  29. 

^Cyvojiku  become,  be  born, 
(of  events)  take  place,  89. 

YiYvcMTKO)  perceive,  learn  to 
know,  49. 

7\v<|>(a  carve,  94. 

7Xcixro*a  or  •yXwTTa,  -tjs,  t] 
tongue,  language,  39. 

^poiJif&a,  -Tos,  TO  writing,  let- 
ter (of  the  alphabet) ,  89. 

7pai^a>  write,  29. 

Tv^jLvaSco  exercise,  76. 

^l&vouTiov,  -OV,  TO  gymna- 
siuin,  76. 

■yvjivo's,  -r ,  -dv  naked,  bare,  76. 

-ycovCd,  -OS,  ij  corner,  angle,  80. 


A. 
AaC|M>v,     -ovoS) 
spirit,  84. 


d     divinity, 


ScVa  ten,  80. 

ScKas,   -a8os,   rj    company   of 

ten,  decad,  80. 
Sc'vSpov,  -ov,  TO  tree,  64. 
Sc'pfia,  -TOS,  TO  skin,  hide,  98. 
Sco-irdnjs,  -ov,  d  master,  44. 
Srjfios,  -ov,  d  people,  72. 
8ia,   prep.  w.  gen.,  through, 

54. 
8iaip€(i>  divide,  103. 
SCatTa,  -TJS,  TJ  mode  of  life,  39. 
SioXc'^ojiai  converse,  103. 
Si8ao-Kci)  teach,  108. 
SCSoifjii  give,  98. 
8Cs  twice,  94. 

Sd^jio,  -TOS,  TO  opinion,  108. 
8dga,  -TJS,  TJ  opinion,  66. 
8pc4i.a,  -TOS,  TO  (1)  deed,  (2) 

drama,  98. 
8pcwa>  do,  accomplish,  98. 
8pdp.os,  -ov,  d   race,  running, 

49. 
Svvajiai  can,  am  able,  94. 
Svvaj&is,  -€«s,  TJ  force,  power, 

94. 

8vvda*TTjs,  -ov,  d  ruler,  dynast, 

94. 

E. 

'Ep8o)jias,  -cC8os,  tj  week,  80. 

€p8o|jios,  -TJ,  -ov  seventh,  80. 

cISos,  -€os,  TO   shape,   figure, 

89. 
cIkwv,  -dvos,  TJ  image,  statue, 

84. 
cUrC(v)  (they)  are,  54. 
cK  or  c{,  prep.  w.  gen.,  out  of, 

from,  64, 


1.V 


If 


cv,  prep.  w.  dat.,  in,  29. 

ifyi  outside,  80. 

^«(,prep.  w.  dat,  upon,  66; 
w.  ace,  to,  58. 

^wCo-Koiros,  -ov,  o  overseer, 
guardian,  72. 

cirwTToXTi,  -TJS,  Ti  letter,  epis- 
tle, 58. 

c'TTrd  seven,  80. 

cp-yov,  -ov,  TO  work,  54. 

cprjjjios,  -TJ,  -ov  solitary,  lonely, 
84. 

60-rC(v)  (^^»  ®^^-) »  ^^'  ^^• 
^(r«  inside,  within,  80. 

cTcpos,  -d,  -ov  other,  66. 
ITtviios,  -tj,  -ov  true,  real,  gen- 
uine, 72. 
cv  well,  34. 
^X»  l^ave,  29. 

Z. 

Zi^v,  -ov,  Td  animal,  103. 


•^Ptj,  -tjs,  tj  youth,  29. 
ijOos,  -cos,  TO  character,  98. 
TjXios,  -ov,  d  sun,  54. 

0. 

0ca,  -OS,  TJ  sight,  show,  29. 
Ofc'dTpov,  -ov,  TO  theatre,  64. 
ecds,  -ov,  d  a  god,  God,  58. 
e€pjidv,  -ov,  TO  heat,  54. 
0€Vis,  -€ws,  TJ   position,  put- 
ting, 98. 


I. 

"ISios,  -d,  -ov  one's  own,  pri- 
vate, 103. 

Upcvs,  -cws,  d  priest,  94. 

Upds,  -a,  -dv  sacred,  94. 

tinros,  -ov,  d  horse,  58. 

to-os,  -tj,  -ov  equal,  72. 

lo^fii  set  up,  cause  to  stand, 
103. 

lo-TopCd,  -OS,  TJ  history,  story, 
34. 

K. 

KaC  and,  49. 

KaKo's,  -TJ,  -dv  bad,  66. 
KoXXos,  -cos,  Td  beauty,  89. 
KoXds,  -Tj',  -dv  beautiful,  89. 
Kttvwv,  -dvos,  d  measuring-rod, 

rule,  84. 
KavoTiKos,   -TJ,    -dv     burning, 

caustic,  108. 
KoU>  burn,  108. 
Kcvds,  -Tj',  -dv  empty,  98. 
Kfpdvvv^i  mix,  103. 
Kc'pas,  Kc'pdTOS,  TO  horn,  98. 
kc+oXtj',  -Vjs,  ti  head,  29. 
kXom  break,  84. 
icXt|ia|,  -Kos,  TJ  ladder,  76. 
Koo-|i€'a>  adorn,  49. 
Koo-iws,  -ov,  d  (1)  order,  (2) 

ornament,  (3)  the  universe, 

world,  49. 
KpaT^ci)  rule,  89. 
KpdTTjp,  -Tjpos,  d  mixing-bowl, 

103. 
KpaTos,  -cos,  TO  strength,  89. 
Kptvw  judge,  44. 
Kpi.TTjs»  -ov,  d  judge,  44. 


110 


GREEK-ENGLISH  VOCABULABY. 


kpiima  conceal,  108. 
Kpvo'TctXXds,  -ov,  d  ice,  58. 
kvkXoS)  -ov,  d  circle,  58. 

A. 

Aa)&Pava>  take,  108. 

Xapxryg,  -70s,  d  throat,  larynx, 
76. 

X€Y<i)  speak,  tell,  49. 

XCdosi^  -ov,  d  stone,  66. 

Xo-yds,  -ov,  d  (1)  word,  (2) 
talk,  (3)  account,  descrip- 
tion, 49. 

Xv<ris,  "cws,  T]  a  loosing,  set- 
ting free,  94. 

Xika  loose,  undo,  let  loose,  94. 

M. 

Ma9i)|j,a^  -tos,  to  lesson,  108. 
|iafcpds,  *&,  -dv  long,  large,  72. 
fjiavdavcii  learn,  34. 
fiavfis,    -cii>s*     d     soothsayer, 

prophet,  98. 
fiAos,  -60$,  TO  song,  strain  of 

music,  98. 
{nc'Tpov,  -OV,  TO  measure,  54. 
|iT)XavTJ,  -Tis,  t5  machine,  34. 
pLiKpds,  -a,  -o'v  small,  72. 
(jLific'ofiai  imitate,  76. 
|jii|jios,  -ov,  d  imitator,  76. 
|iuros,  -cos,  TO  hatred,  94. 
livtiVt),  -Tjs,  TJ  memory,  98. 
f&dvos,  -t],  -ov  alone,  only,  only 

one,  66. 
^P<{>t{,  -tJs,  ij  form,  58. 
p,ovo-a,  -T)s,  TJ  muse,  39. 


I&ovo-ctov,  -ov,  TO  house  of  the 
muses,  museum,  58. 

(iOvo-iKT],  -t]s,  ij  music,  39. 

(iivOos,  -ov,  d  tale,  legend,  49. 

livo-TTJpiov,  -ov,  TO  secret  doc- 
trine, mystery,  108. 

jjivo-TiKos,  -rf,  -dv  secret,  mys- 
tic, 108. 

N.      . 

Navs,  TJ  ship,  84. 
vavTTjs,  -ov,  d  sailor,  84.     ^ 
vcKpds,  -d,  -dv  dead,  94. 
vc'iift)  deal  out,  distribute,  66. 
vc'os,  -d,  -ov  new,  young,  94. 
vdfxos,  -ov,  d  law,  66. 

O. 

*0,  1],  Td  the.  Often  trans- 
lated by  his,  her,  its,  or 
their,  18. 

d8ds,  -ov,  T]  road,  way,  49. 

oIkc'o)  to  inhabit,  dwell  in,  72. 

oIkoS)  -ov,  d  house,  72. 

dXCyoi,  -ai,  -a  few,  80. 

dXos,  -TJ,  -ov  whole,  108. 

dfJiaXds,  -T],  -dv  even,  level, 
103. 

ofioios,  -d,  -ov  like,  89. 

d|iov  together  89. 

dw|Aa,  -Tos,  TO  name,  89. 

dpcui)  see,  49. 

dpyavov,  -ov,  Td  instrument, 
54. 

dp0ds,  -T],  -dv  (1)  straight,  (2) 
upright,  (3)  right,  66. 

dpvis,  -60s,  d,  tJ  bird,  80. 


GREEK-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


117 


OS,  rf,  d  who,  that,  which  64. 
ov,  ovK,  ovx  not,  34. 
d^ofjiai  future  of  dpouo,  76. 

n. 

nddos,  -€os,  Td  feeling,  pas- 
sion, 89. 

iraiSa-ywYo's,  -ov,  d  child-leader, 
teacher,  pedagogue,  80. 

iraiSevw  educate,  80. 

irais,  iroiSds,  d,  t]  child,  80. 

irdXt,v  again,  29. 

irapa,  prep.  w.  dat.,  at  the  side 
of,  beside,  44. 

irapaPciXXw  compare,  44. 

irapaPoXri,  -ris,  ti  comparison, 
illustration,  parable,  44. 

irapd8€uros,  -ov,  d  park,  58. 

irds,  ircura,  irdv  all,  every,  108. 

ircipa,  -as,  r\  attempt, trial,  108. 

ircipao)iai  try,  108. 

ircipdTTJs,  -ov,  d  pirate,  108. 

ircTTTw  digest,  103. 

ircpC,  prep.  w.  gen.,  about,  con- 
cerning; w.  ace,  around, 
29  and  54. 

irXouro-o)  form,  mould,  103. 

irvcvjjia,  -TOS,  rd  wind,  breath, 
89. 

irvcv|Ui>v,  -ovos,  d  lung,  89. 

iroictt  make,  39. 

iroiTinJs,  -ov,  d  poet,  44. 

iro'Xc|vos,  -ov,  d  war,  58. 

iro'Xis,  -€«s,  TJ  city,  94. 

iroXtTqs,  -ov,  d  citizen,  44. 

^oXvs,  ttoXXtJ,  iroXv  much, 
(plural)  many,  89. 


iroTafids,  -ov,  d  river,  58. 
irovs,  iro8ds,  d  foot,  80. 
irpa^fjia,  -tos,  Td  deed,  affair 

108. 
irpcboro-o)  accomplish,  108. 
irpco-pvTcpos,  -d,  -ov  older,  elder, 

72. 
irpd,  prep.  w.  gen.,  before,  89. 
irpcdTos,  -11,  -ov  first,  76. 
irvp,  irvpds,  to  fire,  84. 
ircoXcca  sell,  66. 


Tt(t«p,  -opos,  d  orator,  84. 
pts,  pivds,  t5  nose,  98. 
pdSov,  -ov,  TO  rose,  54. 

2. 

2ap|,  -Ko's,  1]  flesh,  76. 

o-Kcirrofiai  view,  examine,  72. 

o-KTJTTTpov,  -ov,  Td  Staff,  sccptrc, 
54. 

o-Koirds,  -ov,  d  watcher,  look- 
out, 72. 

o'o<i>Cd,  -OS,  11  wisdom,  66. 

o-o4>Ctop.ai,  am  clever,  or  wise, 
72. 

o-o<|>ds,  -TJ,  -dv  wise,  66. 

oTc'XXft)  send,  58. 

o^cpcds,  -d,  -dv  firm,  solid,  76. 

(ttCxos,  -ov,  d  line  (as  of  writ- 
ing), 94. 

o-vv,  prep.  w.  dat.,  with,  76. 

o^v6co-is,  -c«s,  TJ  a  putting  to- 
gether, composition,  98. 

<rvvTlBii]\i%  put  together,  98. 

o-<l>aipa,  -ds,  TJ  ball,  sphere,  39. 


118 


GREEK-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


o-xCl«,  split,  108. 

(rxoXG%a>,  have  leisure,  34. 

<rxoXii,  -Tjs,  Ti  leisure,  school, 

34. 

T. 

Ta|is,  -€«s,  11  arrangement,  94. 

Ta<r<ra>  arrange,  94. 

toL4k>s,  -ov,  o  grave,  tomb,  98. 

Te|j.v(D  cut,  103. 

T€xvii,  "US,  11  art,  skill,  58. 

TTJXc  at  a  distance,  afar,  34. 

t(  what?  29. 

tC9ti|ii  put,  place,  98. 

Toiros,  -ov,  d  place,  58. 

Tp€ir(i>  turn  54. 

TpoTTOSj  -ov,  d  turn,  54. 

Tp€is  three,  80. 

Tviros,  -ov,  d  type,  76. 

TviTTft)  strike,  76. 

Y. 

•Y^Ccitt,  -ds,  11  health,  39. 

vSidp,  TO  water,  58. 

virc'p,  prep.  w.  ace,  beyond, 
44. 

wcpPoXXtt  outdo,  excel,  44. 

wcpPoXti,  -tjs,  11  excess,  ex- 
travagance, hyperbole,  44. 

^ird,  prep.  w.  dat.,  under,  72. 

^iroKptvo|iai  (1)  answer,  (2) 
play  a  part  on  the  stage, 
76. 

viroKpiTTJs,  -ov,  d  actor,  76. 


^a-yciv,  inf.,  to  eat,  76. 
^aivbi  show,  72. 
<|>aCvo)iai  appear,  72. 
<|>dp|jiaKov,  -ov,  TO  drug,  98. 
<|>€'p<0  bear,  carry,  80. 
(|>T)|j.C  say,  affirm,  108. 
<i>C\o8,  -ov,  d  friend,  49. 
c|>dpos,  "OV,  d  fear,  58. 
^pa.l(a  make  known,  tell,  103. 
+VO-IS,  -c(DS,  11  nature,  94. 
<|)VTdv,  -ov,  TO  plant,  94. 
<|>va)  make  grow,  94. 
<|>«VT],  -tJs,  11  sound,  voice,  34. 
4><3s,  <|>«Tds>  to'  light,  80. 

X. 

XapaKTTJp,  -Tjpos,  d  mark,  84. 
Xapcuro-ca  scratch,  84. 
XcCp,  ij  hand,  34. 
xCjAaipa,  -ds,  i]  she-goat,  39. 
Xpdvos,  -ov,  d  time,  49. 
XpCo-ds,  -ov,  d  gold  76. 
Xp«tfca,  -Tos,  TO  color,  89. 

^. 
^€v8os,  -€os,  TO  falsehood,  89. 
+vxTi,  -lis,  11  soul,  49. 

a. 

•fliSri,  -ijs  song,  ode,  29. 
(Spd,  -ds,  11  season,  time,  29. 


ENGLISH-GREEK    VOCABULARY. 


A. 

-,  Svvafjxii, 


Able,  am  -       ,  ,,.,^ 
About  TTCpi  w.  gen. 
Accomplish  Spaa). 
Account  Xdyos,  -ov,  o. 
Acropolis  aKpoTToXi^,  -ca>9,  tJ. 
Actor  vTroKpLTrj<:y  -ov,  o. 
Adorn  Koafxeo). 
Afar  T^Ac. 

Affair  Trpay/io,  -To^f  to. 
Affirm  fjyrj/u. 
Again  ttoXiv. 
Air  aiyp,  a€po^,  o. 
All  7ra9,  iracra,  irav. 
Alone  /Ltdvo?,  -^,  -ov* 
Ambassador   aTrdoroAos,  -ov, 

6. 
Analysis  dvaA-vat?,  -ecu?,  fj. 
Analyze  avaXvm, 
Ancient  dpx^tos,  -a,  -ov. 
And  Kai, 

Angle  ycond,  -ds,  rf. 
Animal  ^<poi/,  -ov,  ro. 
Announce  dyycXAo). 
Antagonist    4vTay<i)i/c(rT7;9, 

-ov,  o. 
Appear  ^f^alvopxa. 


c 


c 

o. 


Are,  they ,  ctVt(v). 

Around  irtpi  w.  ace. 
Arrange  rdo-o-oj. 
Arrangement  ro^ts,  -ecus, 
Art  rixinjf  -rys,  iJ. 
Assembly  ayo/od,  -as,  ^. 
At  a  distance  rrjXc. 
Athlete  dOkrjTrj*;,  -ov,  o. 
Athletic  ganje  a^Aos,  -ov,  u 
Attempt  irelpa,  -d?,  17. 
At  the  side  of  irapd  w.  dat. 
Away  from  airo  w.  gen. 

B. 

Back  TToXiv. 
Bad  KaKog,  -ly,  -dv. 
Ball  a<f>aLpa,  -ds,  ^. 
Bare  yv/xi/ds,  -ly,  -6v. 
Bear  <f>ip(i)> 

Beautiful  /coAos,  -17,  -dv. 
Beauty  koAAos,  -cos,  to. 
Become  yiyvo/xat. 
Before  Trpd  w.  gen . 
Begin  apx<Mi. 
Beginning  ipxrj,  -^s,  17. 
Beside  irapa  w.  dat. 
Best  apiaroSi  -rj,  -ov. 


120 


ENGLISH-GREEK   VOCABULARY. 


Beyond  virip  w.  ace. 
Bird  opvZs,  -^o?,  6  or  ^. 
Birth  yevecrts,  -€(09,  rj. 
Book  /Sl^Xlov,  -ov,  to. 
Bookseller  ^L^XLOTrwXrj^,  -ov, 


c 
O. 


Born,  am 


ytyvo/xat. 


Break  KXaco. 

Breath  Trvcv/xa,  -T09,  to. 

Brother  (i8cA<j!>os,  -ov,  6. 

Bum  Kao). 

Burning  KavariKOs,  -17,  -ov. 

But  dAAa. 

C. 

Can  8wa/xai. 
Carry  <t>ipw. 
Carve  yAvc^co. 
Caustic  KavaTLKo^,  -rj^  -ov. 
Character  ^^05,  -cos,  to. 
Child  Trats,  TratSds,  6  or  ^. 
Choose  aipeo/JuiL. 
Circle  kvkXos,  -ov,  6. 
Citadel  a/cpo7roAts,  -co)?,  ij. 
Citizen  TroXtrr/s,  -ov,  o. 
City  TToXis,  -c(os,  rj' 
Color  ^oijjua.,  -TO^,  TO. 
Compare  Trapa^aXXo). 
Comparison    Trapa/SoXyy    -rjq, 

c 

^*     . . 

Composition  a-vvOeasy  -ceo?,  17. 
Conceal  Kpwro). 
Concerning  Trcpt  w.  gen. 
Contest  dyciv,  dywvos,  o. 
Converse  StoAcyo/Aat. 
Corner  ytovtct,  -ds,  17. 
Count  dpt^/x€<o. 

Cut  TCjLtVO). 


D. 
Dead  vcKpds,  -a,  -ov. 
Decad  Sc/cds,  -80s,  17. 
Deed  Spa/xa,  -tos,  to. 
Description  Aoyos,  -ov,  6. 
Digest  TrcWo). 
Discourse  Aoyos,  -ov,  o. 

Distance,  at  a ,  r^Xc. 

Distribute  vifJLw. 
Divide  Staipccu. 
Divinity  Sat/xcov,  -ovos,  6. 
Do  Bpdo). 

Drug  <l>dpfJLaKov,  -ov,  to. 
Dwell  in  oticco). 
Dynast  Svvdo-Tiys,  -ov,  o. 

E. 

Earth  y^,  y^s,  17. 

Eat,  to ,  inf.,  <f}ay€2v. 

Educate  7rat8evo>. 
Elder  wpea/SvTepos,  -d,  -ov. 
Empty  K€vos,  -17,  -ov. 
Envoy  aTroo'ToXos,  -ov,  o. 
Epistle  CTrto'ToXiy,  -^9,  ^. 
Equal  tao^,  -77,  -ov. 
Even  op^ds,  -ry,  -dv. 
Examine  aKewropxiu 
Excel  vireplSdXXo). 
Excess  vTTCpjSoXiy,  -^s,  17. 
Exercise  yvfxvd^o). 
Extravagance  xmep/SoXy,  -rjs, 

c 

F. 

Falsehood  i/^cv8os,  -cos,  to. 
Family  ycvca,  -ds,  ^. 
Far  TiJXc. 
Fear  ff)6po<i,  -ov,  o. 


A 


W(^ttSH-G'REli:K  VOCABULARY. 


121 


* 


Feeling  Trd^os,  -cos,  Td. 
Few  dXtyot,  -at,  -a. 
Figure  uho<i,  -cos,  Td. 
Fire  Trvp,  7rvp6<s,  to. 
Firm  cTcpcds,  -a,  -dv. 
First  7rp(i)To<:,  -rj,  -ov. 
Flesh  o-dp^,  -Kds,  17. 
Flower  dv^os,  -^o<;,  to. 

Foot  TTOlJs,  TToSds,  6. 

Force  Svvapxs,  -ccos,  17. 
Form  (noun)  puop^f}!],  -^s,  17. 
Form  (verb)  TrXdo'o-a). 
Friend  <^A.os9  -ov,  o. 
From  dTrd  w.  gen.,  or  c/c,  c^ 
w.  gen. 

G. 

Game  adXos,  -ov,  6. 
Genuine  €Tvpx)s,  ->/,  -ov. 
Give  SiSwfu. 
God  6cds,  -ov,  6. 
Gold  ^vaos,  -ov,  6. 
Good  dya^ds,  -17,  -dv. 
Good  health  vytcta,  -ds,  17. 
Government  apx^^j  -^St  17. 
Grasp  aipco). 
Grass  jSoTavrj,  -rys,  ^. 
Grave  Td<;(>os,  -ov,  6. 

Grow,  make ,  <^va). 

Guardian,  CTrorKOTros,  -ov, 
Guide  dya>yds,  -ov,  6. 
Gymnasium   yv/xvdo'tov, 

TO. 

H. 

Hand  x^^P?  ^' 
Hatred  fxiaos,  to. 


c 
O. 


-OV, 


Have  €xc«>» 

Have  leisure  orxoXd^co. 

Head  K€<fxiXy,  -^s,  17. 

Health  vytcia,  -ds,  ^. 

Hear  d/covo). 

Heat  Oepfxov,  -ov,  Td. 

Her,  possessive,  translated  by 

the  article  6,  rj,  to. 
Herb  jSoTany,  -77s,  ^. 
Hide  hlppxjLy  -TOS,  Td. 
Himself  avTos,  -17,  -d. 
Hippopotamus   tTnroTrdTapw, 

-ov,  6. 
His,  translated  by  the  article 

O,  ^,  TO. 

History  laropid,  'd^,  ^. 
Horn  K€pa<;,  KepdTos,  to. 
Horse  tTTTros,  -ov,  6. 
House  ot/cos,  -ov,  6. 
House  of  the  muses  fjuovaciov, 


-ov,  to. 


I. 


Ice  KpvcTaXXos,  -ov,  6. 

Illustration  Trapa^oXi/,  -^s,  17. 

Image  cikcov,  -dvos,  i7» 

Imitate  fjufxio/juai. 

Imitator  p,rp,os,  -ov,  o. 

In  cv  w.  dat. 

Inhabit  oiKiu}. 

Inside  Ico). 

Instead  of  Slvtl  w.  gen. 

Instrument  dpyavov,  -ov,  to. 

Is  €OTt(v)« 

Its,  translated  by  the  article 

c      c  / 

O,  17,  TO. 

Itself,  avTos,  -17,  -d. 


122 


ENGLISH-GBEEK  VOCABULABY. 


ENQLISB-GBEEK  VOCABULABY, 


123 


J. 

Judge  (verb)  Kptvo)* 
Judge  (noun)  KpiT'qs,  -ov,  o. 

K. 

Rind  y€V05,  -€09,  to. 

Know,  learn  to  ,  ytyvcS- 

Known,  make ,  <l>pd^o). 

L. 

Ladder  KXt/^a^,  -kos,  '^. 

Land  yrj,  7^9,  ij. 

Language  yXClxTcra,  -779,  ^. 

Large  fjuaKpos,  -a,  -ov. 

Law  vofiosy  -ovy  6. 

Lead  ayco. 

Leader  dywyos,  -ov,  o. 

Learn  fjuavOdvo), 

Learn  to  know  ytyvcoo-KO). 

Legend  pJvOos,  -ov,  6. 

Leisure  0^0X1],  -^s,  17 ;  to  have 

leisure  o^oAa^o). 
Lesson  fiaOrjfJui,  -ros,  to. 
Letter  (of  the  alphabet)  ypapr 

pXL,  -T09,  TO. 

Letter  (epistle)  linaToXri,  -^s, 

c 

Level  o^uoAds)  -17,  -dv. 

Life  pCo^,  -ov,  o. 

Life,   mode  of  ,  SouTa, 

Light  <^o>S}  ffxi/ro^j  to. 
Like  ofioioSi  -a,  -ov. 
Line  (ttlxo^^  -ov,  6. 
Little  fUKposy  -a,  -ov. 


Live  olK€(i). 

Lonely  l/ory/xos,  -1;,  -ov. 

Long  jMiKpos,  -a,  -dv. 

Loose  Avo). 

Loosing  Aixrt?,  -ca>9,  '^. 

Lung  TTVCV/XCJV,  -ovos,  6. 

M. 

Machine  ixyi^avri,  -^s,  ly. 
Make  Troiio). 
Make  grow  </)va). 
Make  known  <f>pd^(i). 
Man  avOpoyjTO^y  -ov,  6. 
Many  TroAAoti  TroAAat,  TroAAa. 
Mariner  vavTr]<s,  -ov,  6. 
Mark  ^paKrrjp^  -^pos,  6. 
Marriage  ya/io9,  -ov,  6. 
Master  Sco-TroTT^s,  -ov,  6. 
Measure  fi^Tpov,  -ov,  Td. 
Measuring-rod  Kavaiv,  -dvo?,  o. 
Memory  fivrjfjirj,  -77s,  17. 
Messenger  ayycAos,  -ov,  o. 
Mix  KcpdwvfJiL. 
Mixing-bowl  KpdT'qp,  'rjpo^,  6. 
Mode  of  life  SwitTa,  -77s,  17. 
Mould  TrAaco-o). 
Much  TToAvs,  TToAAiy,  TToAiy. 
Muse  /xowa,  -rj<%,  rj. 
Museum  fiovaelov,  to. 
Music  fwva'iK'q,  -rjsy  ^7. 

N. 

Naked  yv/xvds,  -77,  -dv. 
Name  dw/xa,  -tos,  Td. 
Nature,  f^ixns,  -ca>s,  17. 
New  v€os,  -d,  -ov. 
North-wind  ^opids,  -ov,  o. 


Nose  pt5,  plvd?,  17. 
Not  ov,  ovK,  ov;(. 
Number  dptd/xds,  -ov,  6. 

O. 

Ode  wSt;,  -^9,  17. 

Older  7rpco-/3vTcpo9,  -d,  -ov. 

On  CTTc  w.  dat. 

Only,  only  one,  fiovo^,  -rj,  -ov. 

Opinion    Sd^a,    -779,    ^5     ^^ 

8dy/uta,  -T09,  TO. 
Orator  prjTwp^  -opos,  o. 
Origin  y€vc<n9,  -€(09,  ^. 
Other  aAAo9,  -77,  -o ;  or  lT€po9, 

-d,  -ov. 
Outdo  vTrep/SaXXw. 
Out  of  CK,  €^,  w.  gen. 
Outside  €^<i). 

Overseer  €7rtaK07ro9,  -ov,  o. 
Own,  one's  own,  t8to9,'^d,  -ov. 

P. 

Pain  aAyo9,  -C09,  to. 
Park  7rapa8cto'09.  -ov,  o. 
Passion  7ra^o9,  -C09,  to. 
Pedagogue  7rat8aya>yd9,  -ov,  6. 
People  Srjfwsy  -ov,  6. 
Perceive   alaOdvopjca  or   yt- 

yvcjCKO). 
Pipe  avAd9,  -ov,  o. 
Pirate  7rctpdT779,  -ov,  o. 
Place  (noun)  Td7ro9,  -ov,  o. 

Place,  take ,  ytyvo/uuit. 

Place  (verb)  TiOrjfu. 
Plant  <^vTdv,  -ov,  Td. 
Poet  7roi77T779,  -ov,  o. 
Position  ^€0-19,  -CC09, 17. 


Power  8wa/U9,  -ca)9,  ^. 
Priest  lepev9)  -€(09,  6. 
Prime  oJCfJirj,  -779,  ^. 
Private  18109,  -d,  -ov. 
Prize  a^Aov,  -ov,  Td. 
Prophet  /xdvTLs,  -CC09,  6. 
Put  TiOrjfU. 

Put  together  (TvvTcOrjfJu. 
Putting    together    o-iV^co'i9, 
-€0)9,  77. 

R. 

Race,  kind,  yevo9j  -C09,  Td. 
Race,  running,  Spofxo^,  -ov,  6. 
Read  dvaytyv<oo-/ca>. 
Real  €Tv/xos,  -rj,  -ov. 
Report  dyycAAo). 
Right  dpdd9,  -77,  -dv. 
River  TroTa/w,  -ov,  o. 
Road  68d9,  -ov,  1^. 
Rose  poSov,  -ov,  to. 
Rule  (noun)  Kavcov,  -dvo9,  6. 
Rule  (verb)  dpx^  or  KpaTim. 
Ruler  8vvdo-T779,  -ov,  6. 
Running  hp6pxy%y  -ov,  6. 

S. 

Sacred  i€pd9,  -a,  -dv. 
Sailor  vavT779,  -ov,  o. 
Same  o  avTd9,  ^  avT77,  to  aiTd. 
Sceptre  aKYJirrpov,  -ov,  to. 
School  axoA77,  -^9,  17, 
Scratch  )(apd(ra'o). 
Season  wpd,  -d9,  v- 
Secret  paxttlkos,  -^,  -dv. 
Secret  doctrine  pvfn-qpi^ov,  -ov, 


Td. 


V 


s. 


124 


ENCfLlSB-CfimEK  VOCABULABT, 


ENGLISH-GREEK  VOCABULARY. 


125 


See  opao)  |  future  oil/ofjun. 

Seize  aipco). 

Sell  TTwAeo). 

Send  o-r cAAo) ;  send  away  airo- 

Set  up  LO-TrjfiL. 

Seven  CTrra. 

Seventh  cySSo/xos,  -77,  -ov. 

Shape  c?8os,  -C05,  to. 

She-goat  ;(t/xaipa,  -d?,  17. 

Ship  vavs,  '^. 

Show  (noun)  ^cd,  -d^,  ^. 

Show  (verb)  <f}aiv(o. 

Side,  at  the  side  of  Trapd  w.dat. 

Sight  Oid,  -as,  17. 

Skill  rexvrj,  -77s,  ^. 

Skin  Sipfjuiy  -tos,  to. 

Small  fUKpos,  -a,  -6v. 

Solid  (7TC/3COS,  -a,  -ov. 

Solitary  Iprj/xoSf  -rj,  -ov. 

Song,  ode,  wSiy,  ^9,  y ;  strain 

of  music,  fjiiXosj  -cos,  to. 
Soothsayer  pAvrts,  '■ecus,  o. 

Soul  i/^x^>  "V^j  V' 

;Sound  (noun)  i^wi/t;,  -^s,  17. 

Sound  (verb)  tfxavin). 

Speak  Xiyo). 

Sphere  (T<f>aipa,  -ds,  ^. 

Spirit  Saiptjjv,  'Ovos,  6. 

Split  a^it^ia. 

Staff  (TK^TTTpOV,  -ov,  TO. 

Star  ao'Tpov,  -ov,  to. 
Statue  elKiiv,  -ovos,  17. 
Stone  At9os,  -ov,  6. 
Story  IdTopLd,  -ds,  ^. 
Straight  opOos,  -rj,  -ov. 
Strength  Kparos,  '€os,  to. 


Strike  tvttto). 
Struggle  aytovL^opai^ 
Summit  ok/x?;,  -rjs,  ^* 
Sun  ^Atos,  -ov,  6. 

T. 

Take  Xap^^dvo). 
Take  apart  dvaXifo}. 
Take  place  ycyvopxu. 
Taking  apart  dvaXvats,  -ca>s, 

c 

V' 
Tale  pAj6o<s,  -ov,  o. 

Talk  Aoyo9,  -ov,  6. 
Teach  8t8ao-K<o. 
Teacher  7rat8aya>yos,  -ov,  6. 
Tell  <l>pd^(i}  or  Acyco. 
Ten  ScKa. 
The  o,  ^,  TO. 
Theatre  OidTpov,  -ov,  to. 
Their,  translated  by  the  arti- 
cle 6,  17,  TO. 

Three  Tpeis. 

Throat  Xdpvy^,  -yyos,  o. 

Through  Sid  w.  gen. 

Throw  ySoAAo). 

Time  xp^^^^s,  -ov,  6;   season 

(jjpd,  -ds,  17. 
To,  with  verbs  of  motion,  im 

w.  ace. 
Together  o/xov. 
Tomb  Td<f>os,  -ov,  o. 
Tongue  yAwo-ca  -77s,  if. 

Top  OLKpOV,  -ov,  TO. 

Tree  ScvSpov,  -ov,  to. 
True  €Tvp.os,  -rj,  -ov. 
Try  Treipdopxii. 
Turn  (verb)  TpcVoj. 


Turn  (noun)  TpoTros,  -ov,  6. 
Type  TVTTOs,  -ov,  6. 

U. 

Under  vtto  w.  dat. 
Undo  Avo). 
Unloose  dvaXvio. 
Upon  €7rt'  w.  dat. 
Upright  op^os,  ->7,  -ov. 

V. 

View  (TKilTTOpXlU 

Voice  <f>(i)vrj,  -^s,  17. 

W. 

War  TToAc/xos,  -ov,  6. 
Water  v8o)p,  to. 
Way  080s,  -ov,  17. 


Week  e)88o/Jias,  -Sos,  17. 
Weight  pdpos,  -cos,  to. 
Well  cS. 
What  Tt. 

Whole  0A0S7  -77,  -ov. 
Wind  TTvcv/xo,  -tos,  to. 
Wisdom  (TOffiid,  -ds,  ^. 
Wise  a'o<l>6s,  -rj,  -ov. 
With  o-vv  w.  dat. 
Within  €o-a>. 
Word  Aoyos,  -ov,  o. 
Work  Ipyov,  -ov,  to. 
World  Koa-pjos,  -ov,  6. 
Write  ypdcjxD. 
Writing  ypdp^pa^  -tos,  to, 

Y. 

Young  v€os,  -d,  -ov. 
Youth  rj^rj,  -rjs,  •7. 


I 


X 


INDKX   OF  ENGLISH   DERIVATIVES. 


A-,  an-  (privalitt)  60,  S,  b. 
Acephalous  81,  B. 
Acme  29;  81,  1. 
Acoustic  84;  86,  1. 
Acoustics  86,  1 ;  86,  6. 
Acropolis  M. 
AcTOXtic  M ;  96»  1. 
Adelplii  M ;  56, 1, 9. 
Aerate  66,  2. 
Aerial  86.  2. 

Aerifonn  86,  2. 

Aerolite  66,  2. 

Aeronaut  86.  2. 

A«thetlc76,  1;  76,  11. 

Aesthetics  76,  1. 

Agatha  66. 

AgnoBtic  60,  3.  b. 

Agonize  64. 

Agony  84 ;  66,  1. 

Air  64  i  68,  2. 

Albuminoid  91,  5. 

Allopathy  69;  91,  1. 

Alpha  and  Omega  6,  a. 

Alphabet  1L 

Amnci^ty  100,  9. 

Amorphou-H  60,  8,  b. 

Arophibious  87,  6. 

Amphitheatre  67,  6. 


AnabaptlHt  51,  5,  b. 
Anachix>ni>;m  51,  5,  b. 
AnaeAtbesia  78,  1. 
Anaesthetic  76,  1. 
Anagram  51,  5,  b. 
Analogon  51,  5,  b. 
AnalogouB  51,  5,  b. 
Analogue  51,  5,  b. 
Analogy  51,  5,  bw 
Analysis  94 ;  96,  7 ;  100, 10,  a. 
Analytic  96,  7. 
Analyze  94. 
Anarchy  62, 1,  b- 

Anathema  100,  IQ,  c. 

Anathematize  100,  10,  c. 

Anatomy  106,  10. 

Anchor  6,  a. 

Anecdote  100,  3. 

Angel  56. 

Anhydrous  60,  8,  b- 

Annapolia  96, 11. 

Anomalouxi  103 ;  105,  7. 

Anomaly  lOft,  7. 

Anonymous  91,  9, 

Antagonist  64. 

Antagonize  64. 

Anthem  66,  1. 

Anther  96. 


•' 


128       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES. 


Anthology  100,  1. 

Anthropoid  91,  5. 

Anthropology  49. 

Anthropomorphic  59,  I,  12. 

Anthropomorphism  60,  6. 

Anthropophagi  77,  I,  2. 

Anthropophagous  77,  I,  2. 

Anti-  68,  1. 

Antidote  100,  3. 

Antinomian  68,  1. 

Antinomy  68,  1. 

Antipathy  91,  10. 

Antiperiodic  68,  1. 

Antiphone  68,  1. 

Antipode  82,  7. 

Antipodes  80;  82,  7. 

Antislavery  68,  1. 

Antithesis  100,  10,  a. 

Antithetic  100,  10,  a. 

Apathetic  91,  10. 

Apathy  91,  10. 
Aphelion  56,  II,  4. 
Apocrypha  110,  7. 
Apogee  31,  3;  57,  1. 
Apologetic  67,  1. 
Apologize  57,  1. 
Apologue  57,  1. 
Apology  54;  57,  1. 
Apostasy  105,  5. 
Apostate  105,  5. 
Apostle  58 ;  60,  7. 
Apostolic  60,  7. 
Apothecary  100,  10,  b. 
Apotheosis  60,  3,  c. 
Arch-  82,  1,  b. 
Archaeology  80 ;  82,  1,  a. 


Archaic  82,  1,  a. 
Archaism  82,  1,  a. 
Archangel  82,  1,  b. 
Archbishop  82,  1,  b ;  74,  9. 
Archduke  82,  1,  b. 
Archetype  82,  1,  a. 
Archi-  82,  1,  b. 
Archiepiscopal  82, 1,  b ;  74,  9. 
Architect  82,  1,  b. 
Archives  82,  1,  b. 
Archthief  82,  1,  b. 
Aristocracy  90,  I,  1 ;  91,  7. 
Aristocrat  89;  90,  I,  1;  91,  7. 
Arithmetic  76. 
Aster  68,  2. 
Asterisk  68,  2. 
Asteroid  91,  5. 
Astral  66. 
Astrology  68,  2. 
Astronomy  67,  II,  9 ;  68,  2. 
Atheist  60,  3,  b. 
Athlete  84. 
Atom  105,  10. 

Autobiography  66 ;  67,  I,  2. 
Autocrat  91,  7. 
Autograph  67,  I,  2. 
Automatic  68,  3,  a. 
Automaton  68,  3,  a. 
Autonomous  67,  1,  3 ;  68,  3,  a. 
Autonomy  68,  3,  a. 
Autopsy  78,  5i 
Autotype  78,  9. 

Baptize  51,  5,  b. 
Baritone  110,  3. 
Barometer  108. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.        129 


Barytone  110,  3. 
Basil  96,  2. 
Basilica  96,  2. 
Basilisk  96,  2. 
Bible  66. 

Bibliography  68,  4. 
Bibliomancy  100,  7. 
Bibliomania  68,  4. 
Bibliophile  68,  4. 
Bibliopole  66. 
Bibliotheke  100,  10,  b. 
Bicycle  60,  5. 
Bigamy  91,  2. 
Bimetallist  68,  9. 
Biography  49;  50,  I,  2;  51,  1. 
Biology  50,  II,  5;  51,  1. 
Bishop  74,  9. 
Boreas  44. 
Botanic  31,  2. 
Botanist  31,  2. 
Botany  29;  31,  2. 
Bureaucracy  91 ,  7. 
Bureaucrat  91,  7. 

Cacodoxy  68,  7. 
Cacography  68,  7. 
Cacophony  66 ;  68,  7. 
Calligraphy  91 ,  6. 
Callisthenics  91,  6. 
Canon  84 ;  86,  6. 
Canonical  86,  6. 
Canonize  86,  6. 
Catacomb  51,  6,  c. 
Catalogue  51,  5,  c. 
Catarrh  7. 
Catholic  110,  10. 


Caustic  108. 
Cauterize  110,  6. 
Cautery  110,  6. 
Cenotaph  98 ;  99,  I,  3. 
Cephalalgia  31,  5;  110,  2. 
Cephalic  29 ;  31,  5. 
Cephalopod  82,  7. 
Character  84 ;  86,  10. 
Characteristic  86,  10. 
Characterize  86,  10. 
Chimaera,  or  Chimera  39 ;  41, 

6. 
Chimerical  41,  5. 
Chirography  34;  35,  I,  3. 
Chiromancy  100,  7. 
Chiropodist  82,  7. 
Chord  110,  11. 
Chromatic  91,  14. 
Chrome  89. 
Chromo  91,  14. 
Chromolithograph  91,  14. 
Chronic  51,  7. 
Chronicle  51,  7. 
Chronology  49 ;  50,  II,  1 ;  51, 1. 
Chronometer  56,  II,  1. 
Chrysalis  76;  78,  10. 
Chrysanthemum  78,  10. 
Chryselephantine  78,  10. 
Chrysolite  78,  10. 
Climacteric  78,  3. 
Climax  76. 
Comedy  31,  7. 
Constantinople  96,  11. 
Cosmetic  49 ;  51,  4. 
Cosmic  51,  4. 
Cosmical  51,  4* 


'% 


130        INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES. 


Cosmogony  91,  3;  95, 1,  2. 
Cosmopolitan  51,  4. 
Cosmopolite  50,  II,  1;  51,  1; 

51,4. 
Cosmorama  49 ;  51,  4. 
Cosmos  49;  51,  4. 
-cracy  91,  7. 
-crat  91,  7. 
Crater  103;  105,6. 
Crisis  46,  1. 
Criterion  46,  1. 
Critic  44;  46,  1. 
Critical  46,  1. 
Criticism  46,  1. 
Criticise  46,  1. 
Crypt  108. 
Crystal  58. 
Cycle  58. 
Cyclone  58. 
Cyclopaedia  82,  6. 

Daemon  86,  3. 
Daemonic  86,  3. 
Daimon  86,  3. 
Daimonic  86,  3. 
Decad  68,  9 ;  80. 
Decade  80. 

Decagon  80;  81,  II,  1. 
Decagram  82,  3;  91,  4. 
Decalogue  82,  3. 
Decameter  82,  3. 
Decarchy  82,  1,  b. 
Delta  2,  a. 
Deltoid  91,  6. 
Demagogue  72;  73,  I,  1. 
Democracy  90, 1,  2 ;  91,  7. 


Democrat  91,  7. 
Demon  84 ;  86,  3. 
Demonic  86,  3. 
Demonology  86,  3. 
Demotic  74,  1. 
Derm  98. 
Despot  44. 
Devil  46,  3 ;  60,  7. 
Di-  96,  1. 
Dia-  78,  8. 

Diabolical  46,  3 ;  60,  7. 
Diacritical  78,  8. 
Diaeresis  105,  1. 
Diagnosis  78,  8. 
Diagonal  82,  2. 
Dialect  103;  105,2. 
Dialectics  105,  2. 
Dialogue  105,  2. 
Diameter  54;  56,1,3. 
Diapason  110,  11. 
Diaphanous  72;  74,  11. 
Diastole  78,  8. 
Didactic  108 ;  110,  4. 
Dieresis  103 ;  105,  1. 
Diet  39;  41,3;  41,5. 
Digraph  96,  1. 
Dilemma  110,  8. 
Dimorphic,  -ous  96,  1. 
Diorama  57,  2. 
Diphthong  5;  68,9;  96,  1. 
Dissyllable  110,  8. 
Distich  96,  1. 
Dogma  108 ;  110,  5. 
Dogmatic  110,  5. 
Dogmatize  110,  5. 
Dose  98 ;  100,  3. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.       131 


Doxology  68,  5. 
Drama  98. 
Dramatic  100,  4. 
Dramatist  100,  4. 
Dramaturgy  100,  4. 
Drastic  100,  4. 
Dromedary  51,  3. 
Dynamic  96,  6. 
Dynamite  94. 
Dynamo  96,  5. 
Dyhamo-electric  96,  6. 
Dynast  94. 
Dynasty  94. 
Dyspepsia  103 ;  105,  8. 
Dyspeptic  105,  8. 

Eclectic  100,  1. 
Economy  74,  6. 
Ecstasy  105,  5. 
Ecstatic  105,  5. 
Electricity  96,  6. 
Elephant  78,  10. 
Emphasis  74,  11. 
Emphatic  74,  11. 
Empiric  108 ;  110,  12. 
Empyrean  86,  8. 
Encephalon  30,  II,  5 ;  31,  5. 
Encyclical  59,  I,  5. 
Encyclopaedia  82,  6. 
Energy  54 ;  56,  II,  6. 
Entomology  105,  10. 
Eph-  68,  6. 
Ephemeral  68,  6. 
Ephemeris  68,  6. 
Epi-  68,  6. 
Epidemic  74,  1 ;  105,  3. 


Epidermis  100,  2. 
Epiglottis  68,  6. 
Epigram  68,  6;  91,  4. 
Epigraphy  68,  6. 
Epilepsy  110,  8. 
Epilogue  68,  6. 
Epiphany  74,  11. 
Epiphyte  96,  14. 
Episcopacy,  74,  9. 
Episcopal  72;  74,  9. 
Epistle  58 ;  60,  7. 
Epistolary  60,  7. 
Epitaph  99,  I,  2. 
Epithet  100,  10,  a. 
Epitome  105,  10. 
Epizootic  105,  3. 
Epode  68,  6. 
Eponym,  91,  9. 
Eponymous  91,  9. 
Eremite  84;  86,  5. 
Esoteric  80 ;  82,  5. 
Ethic  100,  6. 
Ethical  100,  6. 
Ethics  98 ;  100,  5. 
Etymology  72 ;  74,  2. 
Etymon  74,  2. 
Eugene  91,  3. 
Eugenia  91,  3. 
Eugenie  91,  3. 
Eulogium  51,  6,  a. 
Eulogize  51,  5,  a. 
Eulogy  51,  5,  a. 
Eupepsia  106,  8. 
Eupeptic  104,  I,  8;  106,8. 
Euphemism  108 ;  110,  15. 
Euphemistic  110,  15. 


132       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVE S. 


Euphony  34 ;  35,  I,  5 ;  36,  2 ; 

68,  7. 
Evangel  60,  1. 
Evangelical  60,  1. 
Evangelize  60,  1. 
Exodus  57,  3. 
Exoteric  82,  5. 
Exotic  80;  82,  5. 

Fancy  74,  11. 
Fantastic  74,  11. 
Fantasy  74,  11. 

Genealogy  89. 

Genesis  94 ;  96,  3. 

Genetic  96,  3. 

Geography  29 ;  30,1,8;  31,3. 

Geology  31,  3;  50,  11,5. 

Geometry  31,  3;  57,  4. 

George  57,  4. 

Gloss  41,  1. 

Glossary  39 ;  41,  1. 

Glottis  41,  1. 

Gnome  51,  2. 

Gnostic  49;  51,  2;  60,  3,  b. 

Goniometer  82,  2. 

Grammar  91,  4. 

Grammatical  91,  4. 

Graphic  31,  4;  82,  10. 

Graphite  31,  4. 

Gymnasium  76. 

Gymnast  78,  2. 

Gymnastic  78,  2. 

Gymnic  78,  2. 

Hades  7,  a. 


Harmony  61,  7. 
Hebdomadal  80 ;  82,  4. 
Hebe  29. 
Heliacal  57,  5. 
Helianthus  100,  1. 
Heliometer  57,  5. 
Heliotrope  54;  56,  II,  9. 
Heliotype  78,  9. 
Hemi-  41,  3. 
Hemisphere  41,  3. 
Heptarchy  80;  82,  1,  b. 
Heresy  105,  1. 
Heretic  103;  105,  1. 
Hermit  86,  6. 
Heterodox  66 ;  68,  5. 
Heterogeneous  91,  3. 
Heterophemy  110,  15. 
Hexagon  82,  2. 
Hierarchy  94;  95,  II,  1. 
Hieratic  74,  1 ;  96,  6. 
Hieroglyphic  94. 
Hieroglyphics  96,  6. 
Hieronymus  96,  6. 
Hierophant  96,  6. 
Hippodrome  58 ;  60,  4. 
Hippopotamus  58 ;  59,  I,  2. 
Historiographer  35,  II,  5. 
History  34 ;  36,  3. 
Holocaust  108 ;  110,  10.     - 
Homer  7. 
Homoeopathy  89;  90,  II,  10; 

91,  1. 
Homogeneous  91,  3;  91,  8. 
Homonym  91,  8;  91,  9. 
Homonymous  91,  8. 
Horography  30, 1,  9;  31,  3. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.       133 


Horologe  31,  8;  51,  5,  a. 
Horometer  31,  8 ;  57,  4. 
Horoscope  31,  8 ;  74,  9. 
Hour  29 ;  31,  8. 
Hydra  60,  9. 
Hydrant  60,  9. 
Hydraulic  58 ;  59, 1,  1. 
Hydraulics  58;  59,  I,  1. 
Hydrography  60,  9. 
Hydrometer  60,  9. 
Hydropathy  91 ,  10. 
Hydrophobia  58 ;  60,9. 
Hydrostatics  105,  5. 
Hygeia39;  41,  4. 
Hygiene  41,  4. 
Hygienic  41,  4. 
Hyper-  46,  6. 
Hyperbole  45. 

Hyperborean  45,  I,  8 ;  46,  6. 
Hypercritical  44 ;  46,  6. 
Hypo- 100,  2. 
Hypocrisy  76. 
Hypocrite  76. 
Hypodermis  100,  2. 
Hypodermic  100,  2. 
Hypothecate  100,  10,  b. 
Hypothesis  100,  10,  a. 

-ic  78,  11. 

Iconoclasm  84 ;  86,  4. 
Iconoclast  85,  I,  10;  86,  4. 
Iconography  86,  4. 
-ide  91,  5. 
Idiocrasy  105,  5. 
Idiom  103 ;  105,  4. 
Idiomatic  106,  4. 


Idiopathic  104,  II,  1. 

Idiosyncrasy  105,  6. 

Idiot  105,  4. 

Indianapolis  96,  11. 

Iota  2,  a. 

-ise  86,  11. 

-ism  86,  11. 

Isochronous  74,  3. 

Isometric  74,  3. 

Isosceles  74,  3. 

Isothermal  72 ;  73, 1, 12 ;  74, 3. 

-ist  78,  11 ;  86,  11. 

-ite  31,  4. 

-ize  86,  11. 

Jerome  96,  6. 
Jot  2,  a. 

Kaleidoscopic  89 ;  90, 1,  10. 

Laryngoscope  77, 1,  6. 
Larynx  76. 

Lithograph  66;  67, 1,  4. 
Lithology  68,  8. 
Logic  61,  5,  a. 

Machine  34 ;  36,  4. 
Macrocephalous  74,  4. 
Macrocosm  73, 1,  5. 
Macrometer  74,  4. 
Macron  72 ;  74,  4. 
Macroscopic  74,  4. 
Mantic  100,  7. 
Mathematics  108 ;  110,  9, 
Mechanic  34;  36,  4. 
Mechanism  36,  4. 


134        INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES. 


Melodrama  100,  8. 
Melody  98,  100,  8 ;  31,  7. 
Metal  68,  9. 
Metamorphosis  60,  6. 
Metaphor  82,  9. 
Metaphysics  96,  13. 
Metempsychosis  60,  6. 
Meter  54. 
Method  57,  3. 
Metonymy  91,  9. 
Metric  54. 

Metronome  66;  68,  10. 
Metropolis  96,  11. 
Metropolitan  96,  11. 
Microcephalous  74,  5. 
Microcosm  73, 1,  5 ;  95,  II,  9. 
Micrometer  74,  5. 
Micronesia  74,  5. 
Microscope  72;  74,  5;  74,  9. 
Mime  76;  78,4. 
Mimetic  78,  4. 
Mimic  78,  4. 
Misanthrope  94. 
Misanthropy  95,  I,  8. 
Misogamist  96,  10. 
Misogynist  96,  10. 
Mnemonic  98 ;  100,  9. 
Mnemonics  100,  9. 
Mobocracy  91,  7. 
Monachism  68,  9. 
Monad  68,  9. 
Monarch  81,  I,  9. 
Monarchy  82,  1,  b. 
Monastery  68,  9. 
Monastic  68,  9. 
Monk  68,  9, 


Monoceros  100,  6. 
Monochrome  91,  14. 
Monody  68,  9. 
Monogamy  91,  2. 
Monogram  66;  68,  9;  91,  4. 
Monograph  68,  9. 
Monolith  68,  9. 
Monologue  68,  9. 
Monomania  68,  9. 
Monometallist  68,  9. 
Monophthong  68,  9. 
Monopoly  67,  II,  1. 
Monosyllable  68,  9. 
Monotheism  68,  9. 
Monotone  68,  9. 
Morpheus  60,  6. 
Morphine  60,  6. 
Morphology  58. 
Muse  39;  41,  2. 
Museum  58. 
Music  39;  41,  2. 
Mystery  108. 
Mystic  108. 
Myth  49. 
Mythology  50,  I,  3. 

Naples  95,  I,  5. 
Nausea  84;  86,  7. 
Nautical  84. 
Nautilus  86,  7. 
Neapolis95,  I,  5;  96,  11. 
Necrology  96,  8. 
Necromancy  98 ;  100,  7. 
Necromantic  100,  7. 
Necropolis  94;  95,  I,  6. 
Nemesis  66 ;  68,  10. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.        135 


Neo-  96,  9. 
Neologism  96,  9. 
Neology  96,  9. 
Neophyte  94 ;  96,  9. 
Neoplatonism  96,  9. 
Neuralgia  108 ;  110,  2. 
Nomad  68,  10. 

Ochlocracy  91,  7. 

Ode  29. 

Odometer  49. 

Oeconomy  72;  74,  6. 

Oecumenical  74,  7. 

-old  91,  5. 

Oligarchy  80;  81,  I,  1. 

Ology  51,  5,  a. 

Omega  2,  a. 

Optic  78,  5;  78,  11. 

Optics  78,  5. 

Organ  54. 

Ornithology  80. 

Orthodox  66 ;  67,  II,  2 ;  68,  5. 

Orthodoxy  68,  7. 

Orthoepy  68,  11. 

Orthography  68,  11. 

Orthopedy  82,  6. 

Ovoid  91,  5. 

Pachyderm  99,  II,  6. 
Pachydermatous  100,  2. 
Paedagogue  80. 
Palimpsest  31,  6. 
Palindrome  31,  6;  49;  61,  3. 
Palingenesis  31,  6;  96,  3. 
Palinode  29 ;  30,  II,  4. 
Palsy  96,  7. 


Pan- 110,  11. 
Panacea  110,  11. 
Pandemonium  110,  11. 
Panegyric  110,  11. 
Pane  van  gelical  110,  11. 
Panoply  110,  11. 
Panorama  57, 2 ;  108;  110,11. 
Pan-Slavism  110,  11. 
Pantheism  110,  11. 
Pantheon  110,  11. 
Pantomime  78,  4 ;  110,  11. 
Pantophagous  110,  11. 
Para-  46,  5. 

Parable  44 ;  46,  3 ;  60,  7. 
Parabolical  46,  3 ;  60,  7. 
Paradise  58. 
Paradox  68,  5. 

Paragraph  44 ;  45, 1,  2 ;  46,  5. 
Paralysis  96,  7. 
Paralytic  96,  7. 
Paraphrase  105,  11. 
Parenthesis  100,  10,  a. 
Parenthetic  100,  10,  a. 
Parody  31,  7;  46,  5. 
Pathetic  91,  10. 
Pathology  91,  10. 
Pathos  89. 
Patriarch  82,  1,  b. 
Patronymic  91,  9. 
Pedagogue  80. 
Pedobaptist  82,  6. 
Perigee  56,  II,  3. 
Perihelion  56,  I,  3. 
Perimeter  54. 
Period  56,  I,  3. 
Periphery  82,  9. 


136       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DEBIVATlVES. 


Periphrasis  105,  11. 
Periphrastic  105,  11. 
Phaenomenon  74,  11. 
Phantasm  74,  11. 
Phantasmagoria  108;  110,  1. 
Phantastic  74,  11. 
Phantasy  74,  11. 
Phantom  74,  11. 
Pharmacist  99,  I,  6. 
Pharmacopoeia  100,  11. 
Pharmacy  98. 
Phase  74,  11. 
PheQomenon  72;  74,  11. 
Phil-,  philo-,  -phile  51,  6. 
Philadelphia  59,  I,  3;  60,  2. 
Philanthropist  50,  I,  4. 
Philanthropy  49 ;  51,6. 
Philharmonic  61,  6. 
Philhellenic  51,  6. 
Philip  59,  I,  4. 
Philology  51,  6. 
Philomath  108 ;  110,  9. 
Philosopher  67,  II,  4. 
Philo-TurMsh  51,  6. 
Philter  51,  6. 
Phonetic  36,  6. 
Phonetics  36,  6. 
Phonograph  34;  35,  I,  2. 
Phonography  35,  II,  7. 
Phonology  50,  I,  3. 
Phonotype  78,  9. 
Phosphorus  82,  10. 
Photograph  80;  82,  10. 
Photolithograph  82,  10. 
Photometer  82,  10. 
Photosphere  82, 10. 


Phrase  103;  105,  11. 

Phraseology  105,  11. 

Physic  96,  13. 

Physical  94 ;  96,  13. 

Physician  96,  13. 

Physics  96,  13. 

Physiognomy  96,  13. 

Physiology  96,  13. 

Piracy  110,  12. 

Pirate  108 ;  110,  12. 

Plaster  105,  9. 

Plastic  105,  9. 

Plutocracy  91,  7. 

Plutocrat  91,  7. 

Pneumatic  91,  11. 

Pneumonia  89. 

Poem  50,  II,  7. 

Poesy  46,  4. 

Poet  39;  44;  46,  4. 

Poetry  46,  4. 

Polemic-s  58. 

Police  46,  2. 

Policy  46,  2. 

Politic  46,  2. 

Political  46,  2. 

Politics  44 ;  46,  2. 

Polity  46,  2. 

Poly-  91,  12. 

Polychrome  90,  I,  11 ;  91,  14. 

Polygamy  89 ;  91,  2. 

Polyglot  41,  1. 

Polygon  82,  2. 

Polyp  82,  7. 

Polypus  82,  7. 

Polytechnic  60,  8. 

Polytheism  60,  3,  c. 


INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  DERIVATIVES.       137 


Practical  108 ;  110,  13. 
Practice  110,  13. 
Pragmatic  108 ;  110,  13. 
Praxis  110,  13. 
Presbyter  72 ;  74,  8. 
Prester  74,  8. 
Priest  74,  8. 
Prognosis  91,  13. 
Prognostic  91,  13. 
Prognosticate  91,  13. 
Program  89;  91,4. 
Prologue  51,  5,  a;  68,  6. 
Prophecy  110, 15. 
Prophesy  110,  16. 
Prophet  110,  15. 
Prophetic  110,  15. 
Prosody  31,  7. 
Protagonist  86,  1. 
Prototype  76;  78,  9. 
Pseudonym  89;  91,  9. 
Psyche  49. 
Psychic  51,  8. 
Psychology  50,  I,  6;   51,  8; 

96,  13. 
Pyre  86,  8. 
Pyromancy  100,  7. 
Pyrotechnics  84 ;  86, 8. 

Rehypothecate  100,  10,  b. 

Rhapsody  31,  7. 

Rhetor  84. 

Rhetoric  86,  9. 

Rhinoceros  98 ;  99, 1, 5 ;  100, 6. 

Rhododendron  54;  56, 1,  1. 

Sarcasm  78,  6. 


Sarcophagus  76;  78,  6. 
Sceptic  74,  9. 
Sceptre  54. 
Schism  108 ;  110,  14. 
Schismatic  110,  14. 
Scholar  36,  6. 
Scholastic  36,  5. 
Scholiast  36,  5. 
Scholium  36,  5. 
School  34 ;  36,  5. 
Scope  74,  9. 
Skeptic  72 ;  74,  9. 
Slavophile  51,  6. 
Sophia  66. 
Sophism  74,  10. 
Sophist  72 ;  74,  10. 
Sophistical  74,  10. 
Sophisticate  74,  10. 
Sophisticated  74,  10. 
Sophistry  74,  10. 
Spectroscope  74,  9. 
Sphere  39;  41,  3. 
Spheroid  91,  5. 
Static  103 ;  105,  5. 
Statics  105,  5. 
Stereopticon  78,  7. 
Stereoscope  78,  7. 
Stereotype  76 ;  77,  II,  6 ;  78,  7. 
Story  34;  36,  3. 
Syllable  108 ;  110,  8. 
Syllabus  110,  8. 
Syllogism  78,  8. 
Symmetry  78,  8. 
Sympathy  91,  10. 
Symphony  78,  8. 
Synagogue  78,  8. 


138       INDEX  OF  ENGLISH  LEIUVAT1VE8. 


Synchronism  78,  8. 
Synchronous  78,  8. 
Synod  78,  8. 
Synonym  89;  91,  9.     . 
Synopsis  76 ;  78,  8. 
Synoptic  78,  8. 
Syntactic  96,  12. 
Syntax  94 ;  96,  12. 
Synthesis  98 ;  100,  10,  a. 
System  105,  5. 
Systematic  105,  5. 
Sjstematj:^*  105,  5. 
Systole  78,  8. 

Tactic  96,  12. 
TactiCHM;  96,  12. 
Tautolojo' 67,  I,  10;  68»  3,  b. 
Taxidcrmj  100,  2. 
Technical  60,  8. 
Technique  60,  8. 
Technology  53 ;  59,  II,  6 ;  60. 8. 
Telegram  99. 
Telegraph  85,  II,  1. 
Ttel<!plione  34 ;  S5, 1, 1. 
Telescope  74,  9. 
Theatre  29 ;  54 ;  57,  6. 
Theism  60,  3^  a. 
Thelst  60,  3,  a. 
Tlu'miitic  100.  10,  c 
Tliemc  100,  10,  c. 
Theocracy  91,  7. 
Tlicodore  60,  8,  c. 


Theogony  91,  8. 
Theology  58 ;  60,  3,  a. 
Theosoph  66;  68,  12. 
Theosophlht  68,  12. 
Theosophy  68,  12. 
Thermal  54. 
Thennomeler  56, 1,  4« 
Thesis  98 ;  100,  10,  a. 
Tome  108 ;  106,  10. 
Tone  68.  9. 

ToiK>graphy  58 ;  59,  I,  4, 
Tn^gedy  31,  7. 
Tricycle  80 ;  82,  8. 
Trl^'lyph  96.  4. 
Trigonometry  82,  2. 
Trlloio'  82,  8. 
TrijHxl  82.  7. 

Trisyllable  110,  8. 
Trope  54. 
Trophy  57,  7. 
Tropic  57,  7. 
Turcophlle  51,  6. 
TyiK-76;  78.9. 
Typical  78,  9. 
T>TH)graphy  77.  11,8. 

Un8ophLsUcated  74,  10. 


Zodiac  106,  3. 
Z<WHog>'  103. 
Zodphyt4!  105,  3. 
Zootomy  105,  10. 


GREEK  AND  LATIN. 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  First  Lessons  in  Greek, 
with  special  reference  to  the  etymology  of  English  words  of 
Greek  origin.     By  T.  D.  Goodell,  Ph.D.     i6mo. 

This  book  attempts  to  teach  that  limited  portion  of  Greek  which  col- 
lege men  remember  after  they  have  forgotten  vastly  more.  That  is  the 
portion  which  even  those  who  wish  to  banish  the  study  of  Greek  from 
our  schools  would  admit  can  least  easily  be  spared,  and  that  portion  is 
essential  to  a  ready  command  of  the  English  tongue. 

The  first  idea  of  the  book  arose  from  hearing  a  woman  of  unusual  in- 
telligence and  considerable  reading,  talking  about  altruists,  when  she 
meant  agnostics.  Similar  confusions — confusing,  ultimately,  to  the 
speaker,  and  constantly  to  the  listener — are  of  not  infrequent  occurrence 
in  conversation  on  topics  interesting  only  to  the  ' '  educated. "  Moreover, 
much  as  the  Greek  element  of  English  appears  in  conversation,  it  ap- 
pears much  more  in  literature,  and  carries  many  of  the  key-words  to  the 
thought.  He  to  whom  these  key-words  are  not  alive  with  meaning  is  at 
great  disadvantage.  Many  a  man  who  thinks  he  has  retained  nothing 
whatever  from  his  Greek,  except  a  lively  sense  of  the  exact  meaning  of 
such  words  as  metaphysics^  agnostic^  synthetic^  anarchy^  Russophobe^ 
nevertheless  regards  that  sense  as  an  intellectual  acquisition  worth  all  it 
cost.  But  after  all,  how  great  the  cost  of  this  one  acquisition  has  been  ! 
Surely  this  one  result  of  the  study  of  Greek  can  be  reached  without  de- 
voting to  it  years  of  time.  And  yet  mere  dictionaries  or  etymological 
handbooks  alone  cannot  g^ve  what  is  wanted.  It  is  not  enough  to  read 
or  be  told,  even  repeatedly,  that  synthetic  is  derived  from  such  and 
such  Greek  words,  and  therefore  has  such  and  such  a  meaning.  The 
words  in  their  Greek  fornt^  and  with  some  fragment  of  their  Greek 
associations^  must  become  somewhat  familiar  before  one  can  be  sensible 
of  that  grasp  of  their  English  derivatives  which  will  enable  one  to  use 
those  derivatives  correctly  and  fearlessly. 

The  Greek  vocabulary  surviving  in  English  can  be  so  presented  in  a 
sort  of  Greek  primer,  with  its  relations  to  English  so  pointed  out,  that 
even  young  pupils  will  find  the  study  far  from  dull ;  and  thus,  of  just 
that  part  of  Greek  which  they  will  always  use  in  reading  current  litera- 
ture, they  will  be  apt  to  remember  more  than  the  much-abused 
**  average  college  graduate." 

This  book  tries  to  accomplish  these  results  without  waste  of  time  and 
brain-tissue  in  * '  mental  discipline"  of  doubtful  value.  But  the  writer  has 
no  faith  in  royal  roads  to  learning,  does  not  profess  to  have  compounded 
an  educational  nostrum  which  will,  in  a  few  weeks'  time,  electrify  a  boy 
or  girl  into  the  mastery  of  a  difficult  tongue,  and  does  believe  heartily  in 
giving  an  important  place  in  our  educational  system,  for  some  genera- 
tions yet,  to  the  patient  and  thorough  study  of  the  Greek  language  and 
literature.  This  book  is  not  intended  to  lessen  the  number  of  those 
who  shall  enter  upon  such  a  course  of  study,  but  it  is  hoped  that  it  may 
increase  that  number.  Yet  it  is  not  a  sufficient  introduction  to  the 
reading  of  a  classic  author,  and  hence  is  not  a  rival  of  the  various  ex- 
cellent "  First  Lessons"  in  use.  In  putting  these  ideas  into  practice  the 
material  has  been  grouped  about  a  grammatical  outline,  because  the 
thorough  memorizing  of  a  few  inflections  will  save  time  and  labor  in 
the  end,  by  enabling  the  pupil  from  the  outset  to  make  a  certain  limited 
use  of  the  language  on  rational  principles.  In  no  other  way  can  the  re- 
quisite familiarity  with  the  Greek  words  be  as  easily  gained.     Besides, 


GREEK  AJSTD  LA  TIN. 

while  the  book  is  intended  primarily  for  those  who  without  it  would 
never  study  Greek  at  all,  those  have  also  been  kept  in  mind  who  will 
afterwards  continue  the  study.  Yet  with  the  possible  exception  of  the 
dual  number,  the  memorizing  of  which  is  but  a  trifle,  no  feature  what- 
ever has  been  introduced  which  could  involve  labor  outside  of  the  main 
purp>ose,  as  set  forth  above. 

AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  ATTIC  GREEK.    By  Jabez 

Brooks,  Professor  in  the  University  of  Minnesota.     i2mo. 

Presents  essentials  in  such  manner  that  the  learner  may  enter  without 
needless  detention  upon  an  intelligent  and  successful  reading  of  Attic 
Greek. 

The  fundamental  idea — that  nine  years'  experience  in  applying  has 
shown  to  be  practicable — is  to  begin  the  study  of  Greek  with  a  con- 
nected text,  and  to  so  work  this  text  over  as  to  derive  from  it  all  the 
grammar  involved,  and  then  to  attach  to  the  framework  thus  formed 
whatever  further  grammatical  apparatus  is  necessary.  In  this  way  the 
learner's  activities  are  incited  to  discover  for  himself  the  laws  of  con- 
struction, and  the  author  studied  is  made  to  appear  as  their  true  source. 

The  first  chapter  of  the  Anabasis  has  been  found  to  contain  a  stock 
of  words  sufficiently  varied  to  illustrate  all  the  essential  forms  of  the 
accidence,  and  is  according:ly  taken  as  a  basis  for  work. 

Conversation  and  dictation  exercises,  appealing  to  the  learner's  powers 
of  imitation,  form  an  integral  part  of  the  plan,  and,  it  has  been  found, 
give  him  a  natural  and  unconscious  grip  of  the  language  exceeding  that 
obtained  by  any  other  exercise. 

GREEK  LITERATURE.  By  Thomas  Sargent  Perry. 
{In  preparation^ 

A  compendious  philosophical  account  of  the  growth  of  Greek  litera- 
ture and  of  its  relations  to  the  physical  surroundings  and  political  and 
social  history  of  the  people.  In  this  setting  appear  the  outlines  of  the 
great  masterpieces,  with  English  translations  of  their  more  interesting 
or  representative  passages.  The  comparative  method  is  followed,  the 
English  reader's  familiarity  with  his  own  literature  being  made  to  help 
along  his  acquaintance  with  Greek  authors.  It  is  believed  that  the 
college-bred  man  who  got  from  his  study  of  these  classics  in  the  origi- 
nal but  faint  and  distorted  views  of  their  beauties  will  here  find  assist- 
ance in  extending  and  organizing  his  knowledge  ;  and  also  that  the  man 
who  knows  little  or  no  Greek  may  by  this  book  put  himself  in  closer 
contact  with  the  spirit  of  Greek  literature  than  most  students  of  the 
language  have  attained. 

PREPARATORY  LATIN  AND  GREEK  TEXTS.  Re- 
quired for  Admission  to  American  Colleges.  i6mo.  pp.  767. 
Latin  and  Greek  parts  can  also  be  had  separately. 

The  Latin  part  contains  five  books  of  Caesar,  seven  of  Cicero's  Ora- 
tions, 177  pages  of  selections  from  Ovid's  Metamorphoses,  and  six 
books  of  the  ^Eneid  and  the  Bucolics.  The  Greek  part  contains  three 
books  of  the  Anabasis  and  the  same  number  of  the  Iliad. 


GREEK  AND  LATIN. 


THE  GREEK  IN  ENGLISH.  First  Lessons  in  Greek, 
with  special  reference  to  the  etymology  of  English  words  of 
Greek  origin.     By  T.  D.  Goodell,  Ph.D.     i6mo. 

This  book  attempts  to  teach  that  limited  portion  of  Greek  which  col- 
lege men  remember  after  they  have  forgotten  vastly  more.  That  is  the 
portion  which  even  those  who  wish  to  banish  the  study  of  Greek  from 
our  schools  would  admit  can  least  easily  be  spared,  and  that  portion  is 
essential  to  a  ready  command  of  the  English  tongue. 

The  first  idea  of  the  book  arose  from  hearing  a  woman  of  unusual  in- 
telligence and  considerable  reading,  talking  about  altruists,  when  she 
meant  agnostics.  Similar  confusions — confusing,  ultimately,  to  the 
speaker,  and  constantly  to  the  listener — are  of  not  infrequent  occurrence 
in  conversation  on  topics  interesting  only  to  the  ' '  educated. "  Moreover, 
much  as  the  Greek  element  of  English  appears  in  conversation,  it  ap- 
pears much  more  in  literature,  and  carries  many  of  the  key-words  to  the 
thought.  He  to  whom  these  key-words  are  not  alive  with  meaning  is  at 
great  disadvantage.  Many  a  man  who  thinks  he  has  retained  nothing 
whatever  from  his  Greek,  except  a  lively  sense  of  the  exact  meaning  of 
such  words  as  metaphysics^  agnostic^  synthetic^  anarchy^  Russophobe^ 
nevertheless  regards  that  sense  as  an  intellectual  acquisition  worth  all  it 
cost.  But  after  all,  how  great  the  cost  of  this  one  acquisition  has  been  ! 
Surely  this  one  result  of  the  study  of  Greek  can  be  reached  without  de- 
voting to  it  years  of  time.  And  yet  mere  dictionaries  or  etymological 
handbooks  alone  cannot  give  what  is  wanted.  It  is  not  enough  to  read 
or  be  told,  even  repeatedly,  that  synthetic  is  derived  from  such  and 
such  Greek  words,  and  therefore  has  such  and  such  a  meaning.  The 
words  in  their  Greek  form^  and  with  some  fragment  of  their  Greek 
associations,  must  become  somewhat  familiar  before  one  can  be  sensible 
of  that  grasp  of  their  English  derivatives  which  will  enable  one  to  use 
those  derivatives  correctly  and  fearlessly. 

The  Greek  vocabulary  surviving  in  English  can  be  so  presented  in  a 
sort  of  Greek  primer,  with  its  relations  to  English  so  pointed  out,  that 
even  young  pupils  will  find  the  study  far  from  dull ;  and  thus,  of  just 
that  part  of  Greek  which  they  will  always  use  in  reading  current  litera- 
ture, they  will  be  apt  to  remember  more  than  the  much-abused 
**  average  college  graduate." 

This  book  tries  to  accomplish  these  results  without  waste  of  time  and 
brain-tissue  in  * '  mental  discipline"  of  doubtful  value.  But  the  writer  has 
no  faith  in  royal  roads  to  learning,  does  not  profess  to  have  compounded 
an  educational  nostrum  which  will,  in  a  few  weeks'  time,  electrify  a  boy 
or  girl  into  the  mastery  of  a  difficult  tongue,  and  does  believe  heartily  in 
giving  an  important  place  in  our  educational  system,  for  some  genera- 
tions yet,  to  the  patient  and  thorough  study  of  the  Greek  language  and 
literature.  This  book  is  not  intended  to  lessen  the  number  of  those 
who  shall  enter  upon  such  a  course  of  study,  but  it  is  hoped  that  it  may 
increase  that  number.  Yet  it  is  not  a  sufficient  introduction  to  the 
reading  of  a  classic  author,  and  hence  is  not  a  rival  of  the  various  ex- 
cellent "  First  Lessons  "  in  use.  In  putting  these  ideas  into  practice  the 
material  has  been  grouped  about  a  grammatical  outline,  because  the 
thorough  memorizing  of  a  few  inflections  will  save  time  and  labor  in 
the  end,  by  enabling  the  pupil  from  the  outset  to  make  a  certain  limited 
use  of  the  language  on  rational  principles.  In  no  other  way  can  the  re- 
quisite familiarity  with  the  Greek  words  be  as  easily  gained.     Besides, 


GREEK  AND  LA  TIN. 

while  the  book  is  intended  primarily  for  those  who  without  it  would 
never  study  Greek  at  all,  those  have  also  been  kept  in  mind  who  will 
afterwards  continue  the  study.  Yet  with  the  possible  exception  of  the 
dual  number,  the  memorizing  of  which  is  but  a  trifle,  no  feature  what- 
ever has  been  introduced  which  could  involve  labor  outside  of  the  main 
purpose,  as  set  forth  above. 

AN  INTRODUCTION  TO  ATTIC  GREEK.    By  Jabez 

Brooks,  Professor  in  the  University  of  Minnesota.     i2mo. 

Presents  essentials  in  such  manner  that  the  learner  may  enter  without 
needless  detention  upon  an  intelligent  and  successful  reading  of  Attic 
Greek. 

The  fundamental  idea — that  nine  years*  experience  in  applying  has 
shown  to  be  practicable — is  to  begin  the  study  of  Greek  with  a  con- 
nected text,  and  to  so  work  this  text  over  as  to  derive  from  it  all  the 
grammar  involved,  and  then  to  attach  to  the  framework  thus  formed 
whatever  further  grammatical  apparatus  is  necessary.  In  this  way  the 
learner's  activities  are  incited  to  discover  for  himself  the  laws  of  con- 
struction, and  the  author  studied  is  made  to  appear  as  their  true  source. 

The  first  chapter  of  the  Anabasis  has  been  found  to  contain  a  stock 
of  words  sufficiently  varied  to  illustrate  all  the  essential  forms  of  the 
accidence,  and  is  accordingly  taken  as  a  basis  for  work. 

Conversation  and  dictation  exercises,  appealing  to  the  leamer*s  powers 
of  imitation,  form  an  integral  part  of  the  plan,  and,  it  has  been  found, 
give  him  a  natural  and  unconscious  grip  of  the  language  exceeding  that 
obtained  by  any  other  exercise. 

GREEK    LITERATURE.     By  Thomas    Sargent   Perry. 
(/«  prep  a  ra  tion .) 

A  compendious  philosophical  account  of  the  growth  of  Greek  litera- 
ture and  of  its  relations  to  the  physical  surroundings  and  political  and 
social  history  of  the  people.  In  this  setting  appear  the  outlines  of  the 
great  masterpieces,  with  English  translations  of  their  more  interesting 
or  representative  passages.  The  comparative  method  is  followed,  the 
English  reader's  familiarity  with  his  own  literature  being  made  to  help 
along  his  acquaintance  with  Greek  authors.  It  is  believed  that  the 
college-bred  man  who  got  from  his  study  of  these  classics  in  the  origi- 
nal but  faint  and  distorted  views  of  their  beauties  will  here  find  assist- 
ance in  extending  and  organizing  his  knowledge  ;  and  also  that  the  man 
who  knows  little  or  no  Greek  may  by  this  book  put  himself  in  closer 
contact  with  the  spirit  of  Greek  literature  than  most  students  of  the 
language  have  attained. 

PREPARATORY    LATIN    AND  GREEK    TEXTS.    Re 

quired  for  Admission  to  American  Colleges.    i6mo.   pp.  767. 
Latin  and  Greek  parts  can  also  be  had  separately. 

The  Latin  part  contains  five  books  of  Caesar,  seven  of  Cicero's  Ora- 
tions, 177  pages  of  selections  from  Ovid's  Metamorphoses,  and  six 
books  of  the  ^feneid  and  the  Bucolics.  The  Greek  part  contains  three 
books  of  the  Anabasis  and  the  same  number  of  the  Iliad. 


GREEK  AND  LATIN. 

SCRIVENER'S  (F.  H.  A.)  GREEK  TESTAMENT.— 
(if  KAINH  AIA&HKK)  Novum  Testamentum.  Textiis 
Stephanie!  a.d.  1550,  cum  Variis  Lectionibus  Editionum 
Bezae,  Elzeviri,  Lachmanni,  Tischendorfii,  Tregellesii, 
Westcott-Hortii,  Versionis  Anglicanae  emendatorum,  Cu- 
rante,  F.  H.  A.  Scrivener,  A.M.,  D.C.L.,  LL.D.  Accedunt 
Parallela  S.  Scripturae  Loca.     i6mo.     598  pp.     Cloth. 

The  text  is  that  of  the  Authorized  Version  (Stephens,  1550),  with  the 
various  readings  approved  by  Westcott  and  Hort,  and  those  finally 
adopted  by  the  Revisers.  Dr.  Scrivener  has  added  the  Eurelian  Canons 
and  Capitula,  and  references  specially  bearing  on  usage  of  words.  The 
passages  in  which  variations  occur  are  printed  in  black  type  so  that  the 
eye  can  readily  distinguish  them. 

SUETONIUS'S  LIVES  OF  THE  C>ESARS.— Gai  Sve- 
TONi  Tranqvilli  De  Vita  Caesarvm.  Libri  Dvo. 
Edited,  with  an  Introduction  and  Commentary,  by  Harry 
Thurston  Peck,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  the  Latin  Language 
and  Literature  in  Columbia  College.     i2mo,  pp.  xxxv,  215. 

It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  the  reason  why  the  Lives  of  Suetonius  have 
been  suffered  to  remain  so  long  unedited  by  English-speaking  scholars. 
No  work  of  equal  size  that  has  come  down  to  us  from  classical  antiquity 
possesses  a  more  real  interest  or  a  more  enduring  value.  In  the  his- 
torical significance  of  the  period  that  it  covers,  in  the  light  it  throws 
upon  so  many  points  of  Roman  custom,  and  in  the  impartiality, 
thoroughness,  and  conscientious  accuracy  of  its  author,  it  has  always 
been  regarded  as  a  most  important  source  of  information  concerning 
the  men  and  measures  of  the  Early  Empire.  It  is  also  a  rich  mine  of 
personal  anecdote,  giving  innumerable  glimpses  of  many  famous  Ro- 
mans, divested  of  the  stage  properties  with  which  we  almost  always 
find  them  in  the  pages  of  the  professional  historians. 

It  is,  then,  with  the  hope  of  gaining  for  the  Roman  Plutarch  a  wider 
circle  of  appreciative  readers  that  the  present  volume  is  given  to  the 
public.  The  first  two  books  of  the  Lives  have  been  selected  because  they 
have  to  do  with  that  period  of  transition  which,  with  its  tremendous 
moral,  social,  and  political  revolution,  forms  perhaps  the  most  remark- 
able era  of  Roman  history ;  and  also  because  their  subject  is  the  per- 
sonality of  the  two  great  Caesars  who  laid  the  foundation  of  an  empire 
whose  influence  is  still  moulding  the  development  of  modem  Europe, 
as  its  grandeur  is  still  potent  in  the  realm  of  imagination. 

The  text  of  the  present  edition  is  based  upon  the  text  of  C.  L.  Roth 
(Leipzig,  1886).  Some  variations  from  his  readings  have  been  noted 
and  defended  in  the  Commentary.  To  obviate  any  reasonable  ob- 
jections to  Suetonius's  plainness  of  speech,  a  few  sentences  have  been 
relegated  to  the  notes,  but  without  any  alteration  in  the  original  num- 
bering of  the  sections.  These  textual  omissions  have  been  made  with 
a  sparing  hand  ;  for  experience  has  only  served  to  strengfthen  the  con- 
viction of  the  editor,  that  the  application  to  a  classic  author  of  any  ex- 
tended system  of  expurgation  is  at  once  a  moral  blunder  and  a  literary 
crime. 

HENRY  HOLT  &  CO.,  Publishers.  N.  Y. 


>x 


<? 


T,  i 


• 


/ 


I 


hte  stamped 


>,  Q   (.  ii'^ 


QcGU 


]^±^ 


m 


Inch^h. 


S^ 


(0 

K 
UJ 

> 


^^^  If  773 


Sj 
Ol 


CO 

in 


CO 

CsJ 


I 


,t 

■f 


f 


W%^  ^-^^ 


C 


ill  ! 


